Introduction to Geometric Probability
This is the first modern introduction to geometric probability, also known
as integral geometry. The subject is presented at an elementary level,
requiring little more than first year graduate mathematics. The theory
of intrinsic volumes due to Hadwiger, McMullen, Santal6 and others is
presented, along with a complete and elementary proof of Hadwiger's
characterization theorem of invariant measures in Euclidean nspace.
The theory of the Euler characteristic is developed from an integral
geometric point of view. The authors then prove the fundamental
theorem of integral geometry, namely the kinematic formula. Finally
the analogies between invariant measures on polyconvex sets and mea
sures on order ideals of finite partially ordered sets are investigated. The
relationship between convex geometry and enumerative combinatorics
motivates much of the presentation. Every chapter concludes with a list
of unsolved problems. Geometers and combinatorialists will find this a
stimulating and fruitful tale.
Daniel A. Klain is Assistant Professor of Mathematics at Georgia
Institute of Technology.
GianCarlo Rota is Professor of Applied Mathematics and Philos
ophy, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Lezioni Lincee
Sponsored by Foundazione IBM Italia
Editor: Luigi A. Radicati di Bmzolo, Scuola Normale Superiore, Pisa
This series of books arises from lectures given under the auspices of the Accademia
Nazionale dei Lincei and is sponsored by Foundazione IBM Italia.
The lectures, given by international authorities, will range on scientific topics from
mathematics and physics through to biology and economics. The books are intended
for a broad audience of graduate students and faculty members, and are meant to
provide a 'mise au point' for the subject with which they deal. The symbol of the
Accademia, the lynx, is noted for its sharpsightedness; the volumes in this series will
be penetrating studies of scientific topics of contemporary interest.
Already published
Chaotic Evolution and Strange Attractors: D. Ruelle
Introduction to Polymer Dynamics: P. de Gennes
The Geometry and Physics of Knots: M. Atiyah
Attractors for Semigroups and Evolution Equations: O. Ladyzhenskaya
Asymptotic Behaviour of Solutions of Evolutionary Equations: M. 1. Vishik
Half a Century of Free Radical Chemistry: D. N. R. Barton in collaboration with
S. 1. Parekh
Bound Carbohydrates in Nature: L. Warren
Neural Activity and the Growth of the Brain: D. Purves
Perspectives in Astrophysical Cosmology: M. Rees
Molecular Mechanisms in Striated Muscle: S. V. Perry
Some Asymptotic Problems in the Theory of Partial Differential Equations:
O.Oleinik
PUBLISHED BY THE PRESS SYNDICATE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE
The Pitt Building, Trumpington Street, Cambridge CB2 1RP, United Kingdom
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge CB2 2RU, UK
http://www.cup.cam.ac.uk
40 West 20th Street, New York, NY 100114211, USA
http://www.cup.org
10 Stamford Road, Oakleigh, Melbourne 3166, Australia
Cambridge University Press 1997
This book is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception
and to the provisions of relevant collective licensing agreements,
no reproduction of any part may take place without the
written permission of Cambridge University Press.
First published 1997
Printed in the United Kingdom at the University Press, Cambridge
Typeset in Computer Modern 10/13pt
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Libmry
ISBN 0 521 59362 X hardback
ISBN 0 521 59654 8 paperback
Contents
Preface page xi
Using this book xiv
1 The Buffon needle problem 1
1.1 The classical problem 1
1.2 The space of lines 3
1.3 Notes 5
2 Valuation and integral 6
2.1 Valuations 6
2.2 Groemer's integral theorem 8
2.3 Notes 11
3 A discrete lattice 13
3.1 Subsets of a finite set 13
3.2 Valuations on a simplicial complex 21
3.3 A discrete analogue of Helly's theorem 28
3.4 Notes 29
4 The intrinsic volumes for parallelotopes 30
4.1 The lattice of parallelotopes 30
4.2 Invariant valuations on parallelotopes 35
4.3 Notes 41
5 The lattice of polyconvex sets 42
5.1 Polyconvex sets 42
5.2 The Euler characteristic 46
5.3 Helly's theorem 50
5.4 Lutwak's containment theorem 54
5.5 Cauchy's surface area formula 55
5.6 Notes 58
viii Contents
6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians 60
6.1 The lattice of subspaces 60
6.2 Computing the flag coefficients 63
6.3 Properties of the flag coefficients 70
6.4 A continuous analogue of Sperner's theorem 73
6.5 A continuous analogue of Meshalkin's theorem 77
6.6 Helly's theorem for subspaces 81
6.7 Notes 83
7 The intrinsic volumes for polyconvex sets 86
7.1 The affine Grassmannian 86
7.2 The intrinsic volumes and Hadwiger's formula 87
7.3 An Euler relation for the intrinsic volumes 93
7.4 The mean projection formula 94
7.5 Notes 95
8 A characterization theorem for volume 98
8.1 Simple valuations on polyconvex sets 98
8.2 Even and odd valuations 106
8.3 The volume theorem 109
8.4 The normalization of the intrinsic volumes 111
8.5 Lattice points and volume 112
8.6 Remarks on Hilbert's third problem 115
8.7 Notes 117
9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem 118
9.1 A proof of Hadwiger's characterization theorem 118
9.2 The intrinsic volumes of the unit ball 120
9.3 Crofton's formula 123
9.4 The mean projection formula revisited 125
9.5 Mean crosssectional volume 128
9.6 The Buffon needle problem revisited 129
9.7 Intrinsic volumes on products 130
9.8 Computing the intrinsic volumes 135
9.9 Notes 140
10 Kinematic formulas for polyconvex sets 146
10.1 The principal kinematic formula 146
10.2 Hadwiger's containment theorem 150
10.3 Higher kinematic formulas 152
10.4 Notes 153
Contents
11 Polyconvex sets in the sphere
11.1 Convexity in the sphere
11.2 A characterization for spherical area
11.3 Invariant valuations on spherical polytopes
11.4 Spherical kinematic formulas
11.5 Remarks on higher dimensional spheres
11.6 Notes
Bibliography
Index of symbols
Index
ix
154
154
156
159
162
164
166
168
174
176
Preface
If we were allowed to rename the field of geometric probability  some
times already renamed integral geometry  then we would be tempted
to choose the oxymoron 'continuous combinatorics.' On more than one
occasion the two fields, geometric probability and enumerative combina
torics, are brought together by mathematical analogy, that most effective
breaker of barriers.
Like combinatorial enumeration, where sequences of objects bearing
a common feature are unified by the idea of a generating function, ge
ometric probability studies sets of geometric objects bearing a common
feature, which are unified by the idea of an invariant measure. The ba
sic idea is extremely simple. When considering straight lines, pairs of
points, or triangles in space, one determines the invariant measure on
the variety of straight lines, of pairs of points, of triangles. This idea is
strangely reminiscent of the underlying idea of enumerative geometry,
with one major difference: whereas enumerative geometry is bound to
the counting of finite sets, geometric probability is given greater free
dom, by extending the concept of enumeration to allow the assigning of
invariant measures. Invariant measures are far easier to compute and,
we dare add, more useful than the curiously large integers that are com
puted in enumerative geometry. This basic idea goes back to Crofton's
article in the ninth edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica, an article
that created the subject from scratch and that is still worth reading to
day. The one other brilliant contribution to geometric probability in the
past century was Barbier's solution of the Buffon needle problem, which
remains to this day the basic trick of the subject, still being secretly
exploited in ever unsuspected ways.
Geometric probability has suffered in this century the fate of other
fields that would have enjoyed a healthy autonomous development, had
xii Preface
it not been for the overpowering development of representation theory.
One can reduce integral geometry to the study of actions of Lie groups,
to symmetric spaces, to the Radon transform; in so doing, however, the
authentic problematic of the subject is lost. Geometric probability is a
customer of representation theory, in the same sense that mechanics is
a customer of the calculus.
The purpose of this book is to present the three basic ideas of geo
metric probability, stripped of all reliance on grouptheoretic techniques.
First, we investigate measures on polyconvex sets (i.e., finite unions of
compact convex sets) in Euclidean spaces of arbitrary dimension that
are invariant under the group of Euclidean motions. A great many
mathematicians are still basking in the illusion that there is only one
such measure, namely, the volume. We merrily destroy this illusion by
proving what is at present the fundamental result of the field (due to
Hadwiger), stating that the space of such invariant measures is of di
mension n + 1 in a Euclidean space of dimension n. The proof of this
fundamental result given in the text is new, due to the first author. It
becomes clear, on reading the applications of the fundamental theorem,
that the basic invariant measure to be singled out from such a bounty is
not the volume, but the Euler characteristic (as Steve Schanuel was first
to realize). Here again we meet with wide ignorance on the part of the
mathematical public: the fundamental fact that the Euler characteristic
is an invariant measure (in fact, it is the only integervalued invariant
measure) is not as well known as it should be. It leads to oneline proofs
of most of the fundamental theorems on convex sets. We develop the
theory of the Euler characteristic from scratch, in a way that makes it
look like an ordinary integral.
Second, we prove the fundamental formula of integral geometry, viz.,
the kinematic formula. Here we displace the common device of Mink
owski sums from its typically central role, not merely as a display of
mathematical machismo, but with an ulterior motive.
Third, we try to bring out from the beginning the striking analogy be
tween the computation of invariant measures and certain combinatorial
properties of finite partially ordered sets. The second author pointed
out in 1967 that the notion of Euler characteristic could be extended
to such partially ordered sets by means of the Mobius function. We
now go one step further and show that an analogue of the theory of
invariant measures in Euclidean space can be worked out in partially
ordered sets, including finite analogues of the kinematic formula and
even of Helly's theorem. This analogy brings out in stark contrast the
Preface xiii
unexplored terrain of classical geometric probability, namely, a thor
ough understanding of the integral geometric structure of the lattice of
subspaces of Euclidean space under the action of the orthogonal group.
It also brings us closer to the current outer limits of mathematics, to
the theory of Hecke algebras, to Schubert varieties and to the quantum
world.
We hope that the reading of this introduction to the field of geometric
probability will encourage further development of these analogies.
The text is based on the 'Lezioni Lincee' given by the second author in
1986 at the Scuola Normale Superiore in Pisa. The authors wish to thank
Ennio De Giorgi, Edoardo Vesentini, and Luigi Radicati for providing
an interested audience for the original lectures. Thanks are also due
to Stefano Mortola for his careful reading of the initial draft, and to
Beifang Chen, Steve Fisk, Joseph Fu, Steven Holt, Erwin Lutwak, and
three anonymous referees for their valuable comments and suggestions.
U sing this book
Although parts of this book assume a knowledge of basic pointset topol
ogy, measure theory, and elementary probability theory, the greater part
of the text should be accessible to advanced undergraduates. Proofs are
either given in full or else stretched to the point from which the reader
will be able to reconstruct them without effort. Only on certain techni
cal measuretheoretic points have we felt the need to omit details that,
although indispensable in a detailed treatment, are of questionable rel
evance in an exposition that is meant to stress geometric insight and
combinatorial analogy. Some notions that appear vague in the early
sections will be revisited later on, after language has been developed for
a treatment in clear and rigorous terms. References and open problems
are deferred to the notes at the end of each chapter.
1
The Buffon needle problem
We begin with what is probably the bestknown problem of geometric
probability, the Buffon needle problem. This solution of the needle
problem via the characterization of an additive set functional serves to
motivate the study of valuations on lattices, the topic of Chapter 2. Vari
ations and generalizations of the Buffon needle problem are presented
in Chapters 8 and 9.
1.1 The classical problem
Parallel straight lines are drawn on the plane R2, at a distance d from
each other. A needle of length L is dropped at random on the plane.
What is the probability that the needle shall meet at least one of the
lines?
This problem can be solved by computations with conditional proba
bility (Feller, for example, solved it in this way in his well known trea
tise [23, p. 61]). It is, however, more instructive to solve it by another
method, one that minimizes the amount of computation and maximizes
the role of probabilistic reasoning.
Let Xl be the number of intersections of a randomly dropped needle
of length Ll with any of the parallel straight lines. If the needle is long
enough, the random variable Xl can take several integer values, whereas
if the needle is short, it can take only the values 0 or 1.
If Pn is the probability that the needle meets exactly n of the straight
lines, and if E(Xd denotes the expectation of the random variable Xl,
then we have
E(Xl ) = L npn
n2:0
2 1 The Buffon needle problem
Thus, if L1 < d, then
and P1 is the probability we seek. Therefore, it is sufficient to compute
the expectation E(X1)' Suppose that another needle of length L2 is
dropped at random. The number of intersections of this second needle
with any of the parallel straight lines drawn on R
2
is another random
variable, say X
2
. The random variables Xl and X
2
are independent,
unless the needles are welded together. Suppose that the needles are
rigidly bound at one of their endpoints. They may form a straight line, or
they may be at an angle. In either case, if the two rigidly bound needles
are simultaneously dropped on R
2
, their total number of intersections
will still be Xl + X
2
. The random variables Xl and X2 will no longer
be independent, but their expectation will remain additive:
(1.1)
The same reasoning applies to the random variable Xl + X
2
+ ... + X
k
,
for the case in which k needles are welded together to form a polygonal
line of arbitrary shape.
Since E(X
1
) clearly depends on the length L
1
, we can write E(Xd =
I(L
1
), where 1 is a function to be determined. By welding together two
needles so that they form one straight line we find that E(X1 + X
2
) =
I(L1 + L2), and we infer from (1.1)
I(L1 + L2) = I(L1) + I(L2).
It then follows that 1 is linear when restricted to rational values of L.
Since 1 is clearly a monotonically increasing function with respect to L,
we infer that I(L) = rL for all L E R, where the constant r is to be
determined.
If C is a rigid wire of length L, dropped randomly on R2, and if Y
is the number of intersections of C with any of the straight lines, then
C can be approximated by polygonal wires, so that Y is approximately
equal to Xl + X
2
+ ... + Xk. Passing to the limit, we find that
E(Y) = rL. (1.2)
This allows us to determine the value of the constant r, by choosing a
wire of suitable shape. Let C be a circular wire of diameter d. Obviously
E(Y) = 2, and L = 7rd. It then follows from (1.2) that
2 = r7rd,
1.2 The space of lines
whence r = 2j(7rd). Thus, for a short needle, we have
2L
E(X1) = P1 = 7rd
3
This result has been used (rather inefficiently) to compute the value
of 7r. Instead, we shall use it as the theorem leading into the heart of
geometric probability, following the ideas of Crofton and Sylvester.
1.2 The space of lines
Let Graff(2,1) denote the set of all straight lines in R2 (the reason for
this notation shall be made clearer in Chapter 7). It is well known that
this set enjoys some notable properties.
To this end, denote by Z1 the number of intersections of a straight
line taken at random with a straight line segment of length L
1
, and let
Ai denote the invariant measure on Graff(2,1). The integral
r Z1 dAi
JGraff(2,1)
depends only on L
1
. Since Z1 takes only the values 0 or 1, this integral
is equal to the measure of the set of all straight lines that meet the
given straight line segment. Since the value of the integral depends
only on the length L1 of the straight line segment, denote this value
by f(L
1
). We can now repeat the argument we used for the Buffon
needle problem: given a polygonal line consisting of segments of length
L
1
, L
2
, . , the number of intersections of a randomly chosen straight
line with the polygonal line is
r (Z1+Z2+ ... )dAr=f(L1+L2+ ... ).
JGraff(2,1)
Since integrals are linear, this becomes
r Z1 dAr + r Z2 dAr + ... = f(L
1
) + f(L
2
) + ... ,
JGraff(2,1) JGraff(2,1)
and we again conclude that f(L) = rL. We shall not normalize the
measure Ai by setting r = 1; rather, we shall decide later what the
'right' normalization should be.
Again we may pass to the limit. Recall that a subset K of the plane is
convex if any two points x and y in K are the endpoints of a line segment
lying inside K. A curve C in the plane is called convex if C encloses a
convex subset. Let C be a convex curve in the plane of length L, and let
4 1 The Buffon needle problem
Zc be the number of intersections of C with a randomly chosen straight
line. Then
( zcdAi = rL.
lGraff(2,1)
In particular, let K1 and K2 be compact convex sets in the plane with
nonempty interiors, and with boundaries C
1
= oK
1
and C2 = oK
2
of
length L1 and L
2
. For each i, we have
( ZCi dAi = rLi'
lGraff(2,1)
On the other hand, since Ki is convex, a straight line meets Ki either
twice or not at all (excluding the limiting cases of tangents, which can
be shown to have measure zero). Thus, the function ZC
i
takes either
the value 2 or the value O. If we denote by Di the set of all straight lines
in R2 that meet K
i
, then we have
( ZCi dAi = 2Ai(D
i
).
lGraff(2,1)
To restate these results in terms of probability, assume that K1 K
2
.
The conditional probability that a straight line shall meet the compact
convex set K
1
, given that it meets K
2
, is the ratio
AI(D1 )
AI(D
2
)
The computation above shows that this ratio is equal to
L1 length(oK1)
= :"'=,7:::::::'C:
L2 length(oK
2
)"
Note that the value of the normalization constant r is irrelevant to the
computation of this conditional probability.
The results above (sometimes designated Sylvester's theorem) can be
compared to the analogous result for points: if K1 K
2
, the conditional
probability that a point taken at random shall belong to K
1
, given that
it belongs to K
2
, is
area(K
1
)
area(K2)'
Thus, we see a striking analogy: replacing every occurrence of the
word 'point' by the word 'line' corresponds to replacing the word 'area'
by the word 'perimeter.' This analogy suggests that a generalization of
Sylvester's theorem to arbitrary dimension may prove worthwhile.
1.3 Notes 5
1.3 Notes
The solution to Buffon's needle problem presented here is due to Bar
bier [5], and was later generalized still further by Crofton in [14, 15, 16].
Crofton's main paper, which set geometric probability on its modern
footing, is the Encyclopaedia Britannica article [17]. It is still an excel
lent reference.
In [95] Sylvester considered a variation of the Buffon needle problem
in which the needle is replaced by a finite rigid collection of compact
convex (and possibly disjoint) sets K
1
, .. , Km tossed randomly into a
plane tiled by evenly spaced lines. Sylvester then considered the cases
in which a line meets one, some, or all of the sets K
i
. In the previous
section we measured the set of all lines meeting a compact convex set K
in the plane. When dealing with multiple convex sets Sylvester was led
to consider also the measure of the set of lines that separate two disjoint
compact convex regions of the plane. This theme has also been pursued
extensively in the work of Ambartzumian [1, 2].
Buffon's result gives a very inefficient means of approximating the
number 11"; for a history of this technique, see [30]. For additional modern
treatments of geometric probability in the plane, see also [1, 2, 49, 82, 90].
2
Valuation and integral
In Chapter 1 we expressed the Buffon needle problem in terms of a set
functional (1.1) on a certain collection of sets in the plane satisfying a
certain kind of additivity. We then solved the problem by characterizing
this additive functional in (1.2), using in this case the fact that the
functional was monotonically increasing and invariant with respect to
certain motions of sets in the plane.
In this chapter we make more precise the notion of 'additive set func
tional', or valuation, on a lattice of sets. The abstract notions devel
oped in this chapter will then be specialized to several different specific
lattices in the chapters following, leading in turn to similarly elegant
solutions to generalizations and analogues of Buffon's original problem.
Section 2.2 is devoted to Groemer's integral theorem, which is needed
to prove Groemer's extension theorems in Sections 4.1, 5.1, and 11.1.
2.1 Valuations
We now introduce a class of set functions that comprise the most basic
and important tools of geometric probability, namely valuations. We
begin with partially ordered sets and lattices. A partial ordering S; on a
set L is a relation satisfying the following conditions for all x, y, z E L.
(i) x S; x.
(ii) If x S; y and y S; x then x = y.
(iii) If x S; y and y S; z then x S; z.
The partially ordered set L is called a lattice if, for all x, y E L, there
exist a greatest lower bound (or meet) x 1\ y ELand a least upper
bound (or join) x V y E L. A lattice L is said to be distributive if, for all
x, y, z E L, we have the following.
2.1 Valuations
(i) x V (y 1\ z) = (x V y) 1\ (x V z).
(ii) x 1\ (y V z) = (x 1\ y) V (x 1\ z).
7
Let S be a set, and let L be a family of subsets of S closed under
finite unions and finite intersections. Such a family is clearly a distribu
tive lattice, in which the partial ordering is given by subset inclusion,
while the meet and join are given by intersection and union of sets,
respectively.
A valuation on a lattice L of sets is a function JL defined on L that
takes real values, and that satisfies the following conditions:
JL(A U B) = JL(A) + JL(B)  JL(A n B),
JL(0) = 0, where 0 is the empty set.
(2.1)
(2.2)
By iterating the identity (2.1) we obtain the inclusionexclusion prin
ciple for a valuation JL on a lattice L, namely
JL(A
1
U A2 U ... U An)
= L JL(Ai)  L JL(Ai n Aj) + L JL(Ai n Aj n Ak) + ... (2.3)
i i<j i<j<k
for each positive integer n.
If A is any subset of S, the indicator function (or simply the indicator)
of A, denoted by lA, is the function on S given by
lA(S) = 1; sEA,
lA(S) = 0; s tJ. A.
A finite linear combination
k
f = L(XilAi'
i=l
(2.4)
where (Xi E R, and Ai E L, is said to be an Lsimple function, or a
simple function for short. The set of all Lsimple functions forms a ring
under the usual operations on functions.
Indicator functions satisfy the following properties:
By iteration of the identities (2.5) and (2.6) we obtain the inclusion
exclusion formula for indicators,
8 2 Valuation and integral
IA
1
UA
2
U ... UA
n
= 1  (1  IAJ(1  IA
2
) (1  IAJ
= L1Ai  LIAinAj + L IAinAjnA
k
+.... (2.7)
i<j i<j<k
A subset G of L that is closed under finite intersections is said to
be a generating set of L when every element of L is a finite union of
elements of G. Using the inclusionexclusion formula for indicators, it
can be shown that every Lsimple function can be written as a finite
linear combination
r
f = L{3iI B i ,
(2.8)
i=l
where Bi E G. A realvalued function v on G is called a valuation on G
provided that v satisfies identities (2.1) and (2.2) for all sets A, BEG
such that AUB E G as well. Note that, since G need not be closed under
unions, identity (2.1) does not make sense for all pairs of sets A, BEG.
Hence, there is no reason to assume that the identities (2.3) should hold
for v if n > 2.
Since every element BEL can be expressed as a union B = Bl U ... U
Bn with B
l
, ... , Bn E G, we can attempt to extend v to a valuation p,
on all of L by setting
p,(B) = Lv(Bi)  L V(Bi n Bj) + ... , (2.9)
i<j
as is suggested by (2.3). There remains to check that p,(B) is well defined,
in the case that B could be expressed as a union of elements of G in
more than one way.
Given a valuation p, on G, define the integral with respect to p, as
follows. For an Lsimple function f = alIA
1
+ ... + akIA1, with Ai E G
for 1 :S i :S k, define
k
J f dp, = L aiP,(A).
i=l
(2.10)
In general, a simple function f has infinitely many expressions of the
form (2.4), for Ai in G. Consequently we must check that the integral
in (2.10) is well defined.
2.2 Groemer's integral theorem
The existence of the extension (2.9) and the integral (2.10) turn out to
be equivalent properties of p" a nontrivial fact stated formally as follows.
2.2 Groemer's integral theorem 9
Theorem 2.2.1 (Groemer's integral theorem) Let G be a gener
ating set for a lattice L, and let f.L be a valuation on G. The following
statements are equivalent.
(i) f.L extends uniquely to a valuation on L.
(ii) f.L satisfies the inclusionexclusion identities
f.L(B1UB2UUBn) = Lf.L(Bi ) Lf.L(BinBj )+ ... , (2.11)
i<j
whenever Bi E G and B1 U B2 U U Bn E G, and for all n :2: 2.
(iii) f.L defines an integral on the vector space of linear combinations
of indicator functions of sets in L.
Proof We prove the implications (i) ::::} (ii) ::::} (iii) ::::} (i).
If f.L extends uniquely to a valuation on all of L, then (ii) follows from
an iteration of identity (2.1). Therefore, (i) implies (ii).
To show that (ii) implies (iii), suppose there exist nonempty distinct
K
1
, ... , Km E G and nonzero real numbers a1, ... , am such that
while
m
LaiIKi =0,
i=l
m
L aiJt(Ki) =I 0.
i=l
(2.12)
(2.13)
Let L1 = K1,, Lm = Km, Lm+1 = K1nK2, Lm+2 = K 1nK3 , and so
on, to define a list L
1
, L
2
, ... , L
p
, comprising all possible intersections
of the sets K
i
. Since G is closed under intersections, Li E G for all i.
Note also that the collection {Li} is closed under intersections.
Suppose that
while
p
LaiILi =0,
i=q
p
L aif.L(Li ) =I 0,
i=q
(2.14)
(2.15)
where a
q
=I 0. Choose an instance of these equations such that q is
maximal. It follows from (2.12) and (2.13) that q :2: 1, while the condi
tions (2.14) and (2.15) imply that q < p.
10 2 Valuation and integral
Suppose that x E Lq  U;=q+l L
j
Then (2.14) implies that
P
O'.q = LO'.ihi(x) = 0,
i=q
contradicting our assumption. It follows that
so that
For i > q, note that Lq n Li = L
j
, where j > q. Using the principle of
inclusionexclusion (ii) we obtain
so that
p
L (3ij.l(Li ) I 0
(2.16)
i=q+l
by (2.15), where each (3i is obtained by collecting the terms containing
j.l(Li). Meanwhile, application of the same inclusionexclusion proce
dure to the indicator functions yields
so that
p
L f3ihi =0
(2.17)
i=q+l
by (2.14). Together (2.16) and (2.17) contradict the maximality of q.
This completes the proof that (ii) implies (iii).
To show that (iii) implies (i), suppose that the function j.l defines an
integral on the space of Lsimple functions. For A E L define
j.l(A) = J fA dj.l.
The linearity of the integral together with the identity (2.6) implies that
this extension of j.l is a valuation on L. D
2.3 Notes 11
A linear functional T on the vector space of simple functions deter
mines a valuation JL by setting
for every A E L. It is easily verified that, for a simple function f,
T(f) = J f dJL.
Thus, insofar as simple functions are concerned, there is a bijective cor
respondence between linear functionals and valuations.
Let B (L) be the relative Boolean algebra generated by the distributive
lattice L; that is, the smallest family of subsets of S containing L that is
closed under finite unions, finite intersections, and relative complements.
Note that for A, BEL
(2.18)
Let I( L) denote the algebra of simple functions generated by finite sums,
products, and differences of indicator functions of sets in L. If follows
from (2.5), (2.6), and (2.18) that Ie E I(L) for all C E B(L).
Corollary 2.2.2 A valuation JL defined on a distributive lattice L has a
uniquely defined extension to the Boolean algebra B (L ).
Proof By Theorem 2.2.1, JL defines an integral on the space of indicator
functions I(L). For C E B(L) define
JL(C) = J Ie dJL.
The linearity of the integral together with identity (2.7) implies that this
extension of JL is a valuation on B(L). D
2.3 Notes
The study of valuations, while natural enough on its own as a finitely
additive precursor to the measure theory of modern probability, was in
vigorated especially by interest in dissection problems on polytopes, and
Hilbert's third problem in particular [8, 71, 72, 81] (see also Section 8.6).
In the sections that follow we shall see that most of the interesting func
tionals of geometric probability satisfy the valuation property in some
respect.
12 2 Valuation and integral
The integral and extension theorems of Groemer may be found in [32).
McMullen and Schneider gave a thorough survey of the modern theory
of valuations on convex bodies in [72), later updated by McMullen in
[71).
3
A discrete lattice
In this chapter we focus on combinatorial properties of the lattice of
subsets of a finite set, properties which carryover in analogous forms
to the lattice of parallelotopes in Chapter 4, of subspaces in Chapter 6,
of polyconvex sets in Chapters 5, 710, and of spherical polyconvex
sets in Chapter 11. An especially important result of this chapter
is the characterization of valuations invariant under the permutation
group. The idea of characterizing valuations invariant with respect to
a group action or a set of symmetries is central to our treatment of
geometric probability; this theme will recur frequently in the chapters
following.
3.1 Subsets of a finite set
Let S be a nonempty set with n elements, and denote by P(S) the set
of all subsets of S, partially ordered by subset inclusion. The set P( S)
is a (finite) Boolean algebra of subsets.
Recall that the union and intersection of sets coincide with the least
upper bound and greatest lower bound in the partially ordered set P(S).
We denote the elements of P(S) by lower case letters x, y, etc.
A segment of P(S), denoted by [x, y], where x ::::: y, consists of all
elements Z E P(S) such that x::::: Z ::::: y. Every segment [x, y) is naturally
isomorphic to the Boolean algebra P(y  x).
A chain in P(S) is a linearly ordered subset; that is, a subset in
which, for every pair x, y, either x ::::: y or y ::::: x. An antichain is a
subset A <:;; P(S) such that, if x, YEA, then neither x < y nor y < x. A
flag F in P(S) is a maximal chain; that is, a chain such that if G ;;;? F
and G is a chain, then G = F. These notions apply to all partially
ordered sets.
14 3 A discrete lattice
For x E P(S), the rank r(x) is the number of elements of the set
x. The antichain consisting of all elements of P(S) of rank k shall be
denoted by Pk(S). The size, or number of elements, of Pk(S) is the
binomial coefficient
A flag in P(S) is naturally identified with a linear order (Sl' S2,"" sn)
on the oneelement subsets Si of S. Hence, there are n! flags in P(S).
A flag contains an element x E Pk (S) whenever x = Sl U S2 U ... U
Sk. Thus, there are k!(n  k)! flags containing a particular x E Pk(S).
This elementary argument gives the classical expression for the binomial
coefficient:
(
n) n!
k  k!(n  k)!'
Actually, the same argument can be made to yield a much stronger
result. Denote by IAI the size of a finite set A.
Theorem 3.1.1 (Sperner's theorem) Let A be an antichain in P(S).
Then
IAIS
Here the expression (n/2) denotes the greatest integer smaller than
or equal to n/2. Evidently equality is attained in Theorem 3.1.1 when
A = P(n/2) (S).
Proof The proof of this theorem depends on a more precise result, known
as the LubellYamamotoMeshalkin (L.Y.M.) inequality. Let A be an
antichain in P(S), and let Ak consist of all elements of A of rank k.
Then
(3.1)
To prove (3.1), notice that every flag meets A in at most one element of
P(S). Therefore, the number p of flags meeting A is
n
p = L k!(n  k)!/Akl
k=O
3.1 Subsets of a finite set 15
Since there are n! flags in P( S), we have p :::; nL Dividing by n! proves
the L.Y.M. inequality (3.1).
To complete the proof of Sperner's theorem, recall that
for all 0 :::; k :::; n. The L.Y.M. inequality (3.1) now gives
that is,
<1
k=O ((n/2))  k=O  ,
D
Suppose that 1 :::; r :::; n + 1 is a integer. A subset F P(S) is
called an rfamily if chains in F contain no more than r elements. For
example, an antichain is a Ifamily. Given an rfamily F in P(S) let
Fk = FnPk(S). Since every flag in P(S) meets F in at most r elements,
we have
n
Lk!(n  k)!/Fk/ :::; n! r.
k=O
We then obtain the following generalization of (3.1):
n /F
k
/
L(n) :::;r.
k=O k
(3.2)
This inequality leads in turn to a generalization of Sperner's theorem to
rfamilies:
Theorem 3.1.2 Let F be an rfamily in P(S). Then
In order to prove Theorem 3.1.2 we make use of the following lemma.
Lemma 3.1.3 Suppose that Co 2: CI 2: ... 2: C
n
> o. If Ci 2: Xi 2: 0 for
0:::; i :::; n, and if
Xo + Xl + ... + Xn 2: Co + CI + ... + Crl, (3.3)
16 3 A discrete lattice
then
(3.4)
If Co > ... > C
n
> 0, then equality holds in (34) if and only if Xi = Ci
for 0 :::; i :::; r  1 and Xi = 0 for r :::; i :::; n.
Proof Suppose that Xo, . .. ,X
n
::::: 0 minimize the sum
(3.5)
subject to the condition (3.3). If this minimum value of (3.5) is less than
r then Xi < Ci for some i :::; r  1. Let i be the smallest index such that
Xi < Ci, so that Xk/Ck = 1 for all 0:::; k < i (unless i = 0).
The inequality (3.3) then implies that there is an index j ::::: r such
that Xj > O. Let j be the largest such index, so that Xk = 0 for k > j
(unless j = n). In particular, note that j > i.
Suppose Ci = Cj. Since Ci ::::: CHI ::::: Cj, we have Ci = CHI = ... =
Cj. It then follows that
Co + ... + CiI + Xi + ... + Xj Xo + ... +x
n
> Co + ... + CrI
Co + ... + CiI + (r  i)Ci,
since r  1 < j. Therefore,
Xi + ... + Xj ::::: (r  i)Ci. (3.6)
It follows that
3.1 Subsets of a finite set
by (3.6). In other words,
n
L Xk 2: r.
k=O Ck
17
(3.7)
This contradicts the assumption that Xo, .. , Xn Illllllmizes (3.5) at a
value less than r. Therefore, inequality (3.4) follows.
Now suppose instead that Ci > Cj. If Xi + Xj :s; Ci set Yi = Xi + Xj and
Yj = O. Otherwise, set Yi = Ci and Yj = Xj  (Ci  Xi). In either case set
all other Yk = Xk
Since Ci > Cj it follows in both cases that
Yi + Yj < Xi + Xj,
Ci Cj Ci Cj
so that
n n
L
Yk
<L
Xk
,
k=O Ck k=O Ck
contradicting the assumption that Xo, . ,X
n
minimizes (3.5). Inequal
ity (3.4) now follows again for this case.
If Co > ... > Cn, then Ci > Cj is guaranteed, and so it follows that (3.5)
is minimized only if Xi = Ci for 0 :s; i :s; r  1 and Xi = 0 for r :s; i :s; n.
D
Proof of Theorem 3.1.2 Relabel the binomial coefficients Co, CI,, C
n
in descending order, so that Co 2: CI 2: ... 2: en > 0; then relabel the
numerators /F
k
/ in (3.2) by xo, Xl, .. , X
n
, so that each Xk is the numera
tor of that term of (3.2) having Ck as denominator. The inequality (3.2)
now becomes
It then follows from Lemma 3.1.3 that
Xo + Xl + ... + Xn :s; Co + CI + ... + Crl
In other words,
D
The theory of binomial coefficients and antichains generalizes nicely
to a theory of multinomial coefficients and special collections of ordered
18 3 A discrete lattice
partitions, known as ssystems. Sperner's result can also be generalized
from a bound on the size of an antichain to a bound on the size of an
ssystem.
A map 15 : {I, ... ,r} + P(8) is called an rdecomposition of 8 if
(i) 8(i) n 8(j) = 0 for i i= j, and
(ii) 15(1) U U 8(r) = 8.
Denote by Dec(8, r) the set of all rdecompositions of 8. Note that for
each 15 E Dec(8, r)
115(1)1 + ... + 18(r)1 = n.
Given nonnegative integers aI, a2, ... , a
r
such that al + ... + a
r
= n
we denote by P
al
, ... ,a
r
(8) the set of all rdecompositions 15 such that
18(i)1 = ai for i = 1, ... ,r. In other words, P
al
, ... ,a
r
(8) is the set of
all (ordered) partitions of 8 into disjoint unions of subsets having sizes
aI, ... , a
r
. Evidently the set Dec( 8, r) can be expressed as the finite
disjoint union
Dec(8,r) =
The size of Pal, ... ,a
r
(8) is given by the multinomial coefficient
An ssystem of order r (or an ssystem in Dec(8, r)) is a subset (J
Dec( 8, r) such that the set
{ 15 (i) : 15 E (J} (3.8)
is an antichain in P(8) for each 1 ::::; i ::::; r.
An obvious example of an ssystem of order r is P
al
, ... ,a
r
(8) for some
admissible selection of aI, ... , ar . If 15, ( E Pal, ... ,a
r
(8) then 15 (i) and
((i) both have size ai, so that either 8(i) = ((i) or the two sets are
incomparable in the subset partial ordering on P(8). This holds for
i = 1, ... , r, and so the antichain condition on (3.8) is satisfied.
Other disguised examples with which we have already worked are the
ssystems of order 2. Let A be an antichain in P(8). For each x E A we
can express 8 as the disjoint union x lJ 8  x, so that the pair (x, 8  x)
is a 2decomposition in Dec(8, 2). Moreover, the set
{8x:xEA}
3.1 Subsets of a finite set
is also an antichain in P(S), so that the set
IT = {(x, S  x) : x E A}
19
is an ssystem of order 2. Thus the notion of ssystem is a generalization
ofthe notion of an antichain. Similarly, the collection Pk(S) can also be
viewed as Pk,nk(S) through the bijection x f+ (x, S  x).
For 15 E Pa1, ... ,ar(S) we say that a flag (XO,XI,""Xn) in P(S) is
compatible with 15 if
(i) x
a1
= 15(1), and
(ii) x a1 +'+ai  xal+.+ai_l = 8(i), for i :2: 2.
Here the difference X
a1
+.+ai  X
a1
+.+ail denotes the complement of
the set xal+.+ai_l inside the larger set x
a1
+.+ai . For A <:;;: Pa1, ... ,a
r
,
let Flag(A) be the set of all flags (xo, Xl,.'" Xn) compatible with some
15 E A.
Note that for each 15 E Pa1, ... ,ar(S), there are exactly al!a2!'" ar! flags
compatible with 15; that is, to choose a flag compatible with 15 one must
choose a permutation of the al elements of 15(1), of which there are all,
and then a permutation of the a2 elements of 15(2), of which there are
a2!, and so on up through 8(r). Since each of the n! flags is compatible
with one (and only one) rdecomposition in Pa1, ... ,ar(S), it follows that
Just as Sperner's Theorem 3.1.1 gives the maximum possible measure
for an antichain A in P(S), a generalization of this theorem gives the
maximum possible size for an ssystem in Dec( S, r). En route to such a
generalization we prove a multinomial version of the L.Y.M. inequality.
Theorem 3.1.4 (The multinomial L.Y.M. inequality) Let IT C
Dec(S, r) be an ssystem. For al + ... + a
r
= n let
so that
IT=
u
is a disjoint union. Then
(3.9)
20 3 A discrete lattice
Proof For al + .. +ar = n the number of flags compatible with aal, ... ,a
r
is given by
I
Flag(a )1 = la lal"" a ,
al, ... ,ar al, ... ,ar r
Suppose that a flag (XO,Xl, ... ,X
n
) is compatible with both ,,(,8 E
a. Then "(1) = x
a1
and 8(1) = Xbll where al = h(l)1 and bl =
18(1)1. Since (XO, Xl,"" Xn) is a flag, we have X
a1
Xbl or vice versa.
However, a is an ssystem, so that either "(1) = 8(1) or the two sets
are incomparable. Therefore "(1) = 8(1) and al = b
l
. Continuing, we
have "(2) = x
a1
+
a2
 X
a1
and 8(2) = Xbl+b2  x
a1
(since al = bI). A
similar argument then implies that "(2) = 8(2) and a2 = b
2
. Continuing
in this manner we conclude that "(i) = 8(i) for each 1 i r, so that
"( = 8. In other words, every flag in P(S) is compatible with at most
one rdecomposition 8 E a. It follows that
l
a lall. a ,
al, ... ,ar . r'
L IFlag(aal, ... ,aJI = IFlag(a)I n!
al++ar=n
so that
D
We are now ready to prove a multinomial generalization of Sperner's
Theorem 3.1.1.
Theorem 3.1.5 (Meshalkin's theorem) Let a be an ssystem in
Dec(S, r). Then
lal ((n/r) , ... , (n/r), (n7r) + 1"", (n/r) + 1) (3.10)
, ", , ",
v v
rb b
where n == b mod r.
Here (n/r) denotes the largest positive integer less than or equal to n/r.
Proof It is not difficult to show that, for all compositions al + .. +a
r
= n
of a positive integer n, we have
3.2 Valuations on a simplicial complex 21
For a sketch of a proof, see the analogous Proposition 6.5.2.
Let aal, ... ,a
r
= an P
a1
, ... ,a
r
(8). It now follows from (3.9) that
L ( /aal, ... ,arl ) < L /za1,;;.,a)/ ::; 1,
al ++ar=n (n/r), .. ,(n/r),(n/r)+l, .. ,(n/r)+l al ++ar=n al,,ar
so that
/a/
... ,ar/ ::; Cn/r) , .' .. , (n/r) , (n7r) + 1"", (n/r) + 1)'
D
Several other results of extremal set theory follow from the L.Y.M.
inequality or its variants, but we reluctantly move on to the next topic.
3.2 Valuations on a simplicial complex
Define a simplicial complex to be a subset A of P( 8) such that if x E A
and y ::; x then YEA. A simplicial complex is a partially ordered set
in the order induced by P(8). The set of maximal elements of a simpli
cial complex is an antichain. A simplicial complex having exactly one
maximal element is called a simplex. A simplex whose unique maximal
element is a set of size k is called a ksimplex.
The (settheoretic) union and intersection of any number of simpli
cial complexes is again a simplicial complex. Thus, the set L(8) of all
simplicial complexes in P(8) is a distributive lattice, and we can study
valuations on L(8).
For x E P(8), denote by x the simplex whose maximal element is X;
that is, the set of all y E P(8) such that y ::; x.
It follows from Groemer's integral Theorem 2.2.1 and Corollary 2.2.2
that every valuation fJ on L(8) extends uniquely to a valuation, again
denoted by fJ, on the Boolean algebra P(P(8)) of all subsets of P(8),
which is generated by L(8). Such a valuation is evidently determined
by its value on the oneelement subsets of P( 8); that is, by arbitrarily
assigning a value fJ( {x}) for each X E P(8).
,Let x be of rank k, and let A 1, A
2
, . ,Ak be the maximal simplices
Ai E x such that Ai i= x. (These simplices are sometimes called the
facets of x.) Then
22 3 A discrete lattice
The righthand side can be computed in terms of simplices of lower rank,
by the inclusionexclusion principle. Thus, by induction on the rank,
we have the following theorem.
Theorem 3.2.1 Every valuation Jl on the distributive lattice L(8) of
all simplicial complexes is uniquely determined by the values Jl(X) , x E
P(8). The values Jl(x) may be arbitrarily assigned. D
A valuation Jl on L(8) is called invariant if it is invariant under the
group of permutations of the set 8; that is, if Jl(A) = Jl(gA) for every
simplicial complex A and for every permutation 9 of the set 8 (which
induces a permutation on L(8), also denoted by g). We next establish
the existence of the Euler characteristic. The following is an immediate
consequence of Theorem 3.2.1.
Theorem 3.2.2 (The existence of the Euler characteristic) There
exists a unique invariant valuation Jl on L(8), called the Euler charac
teristic, such that Jlo(x) = 1 for every simplex x with rex) > 0, and such
that Jlo(0) = 0. D
Next, we derive the classical alternating formula for the Euler charac
teristic. Define a valuation on P(P(8)), denoted by setting
= 0,
and
= (I)kl,
if rex) = k. Then
= L {y})
y<;'x
L +
L + ... +
y<;,x,r(y)=l y<;,x,r(y)=2
Since the simplex x contains
elements of rank j, the righthand side simplifies to
G) G) + G) ... + (_I)k+l G) = 1,
3.2 Valuations on a simplicial complex 23
so that = JLo(x), for all simplices x. It now follows from Theo
rem 3.2.1 that = JLo, and that the following formula holds.
Theorem 3.2.3 (The discrete Euler formula) Let A be a simplicial
complex, and let fk be the number of elements {or 'faces'} of rank k.
Then
JLo(A) = h  h + h  .... (3.11)
D
For i > 0, set
and extend JLi to all of L(8) by Theorem 3.2.1. Clearly, for every sim
plicial complex A,
The discrete Euler formula can now be rewritten
JLo(A) = JL1(A) 1L2(A) + JL3(A)  ... , (3.12)
for any simplicial complex A.
The valuations JLk can also be expressed in terms of symmetric func
tions. Let P1 (8) = {a1' a2, ... , an}. Given the symmetric function
let ti(X) = 1 if ai E x and ti(X) = 0 if ai fj. x. Evaluated at x, for
x f 0, we have til ti2 ... tik = 1 if {ail' ... ,aik} E x, and til ti2 ... tik = 0
otherwise. It follows that ek(t1, t2, ... , tn) = JLk(X) for every simplex x
other than {0}.
Note also that if x E P(8) and r(x) = j then JLi({X}) = 1 if i = j,
while JLi({X}) = 0 ifi fj.
Theorem 3.2.4 (The discrete basis theorem) The invariant valu
ations JLo, JL1, ... ,JLn span the vector space of all invariant valuations JL
on L(8) such that JL( {0}) = O. The only linear relation among them is
formula {3.12}.
Proof Suppose JL is an invariant valuation on L(8) such that JL( {0}) = o.
Extend JL to all of P(P(8)). Note that the extended valuation, which
is still denoted JL, is again invariant. If x and y have the same rank in
P(8), say r(x) = r(y) = i, then there exists a permutation g of 8 such
24 3 A discrete lattice
that gx = y. Therefore, JL( {x}) = JL( {y}) = Ci, for some constant Ci'
Thus, the valuation
vanishes on all singleton sets {x}, for all x E P(8), and therefore vanishes
on all of P(P(8)). D
As an application of the discrete basis theorem, we shall derive a
discrete analogue of the kinematic formula (whose classical geometric
version appears in Chapter 10).
One way to construct invariant valuations on L(8) is the following.
Start with any valuation JL on L(8) such that JL( {0}) = 0, and let B be
any simplicial complex. For any simplicial complex A, set
1
JL(A; B) = , L JL(A n gB),
n.
9
where 9 ranges over all permutations of the set 8 of size n. For fixed
A, the set function JL(A; B) is a valuation in the variable B; in fact,
it is an invariant valuation. It can therefore be expressed as a linear
combination of the valuations JLi, with coefficients ci(A) depending on
A:
n
JL(A; B) = L ci(A)JLi(B). (3.13)
i=l
Meanwhile, for fixed B, the set function JL(A; B) is a valuation in the
variable A. From this it follows that each of the coefficients ci(A) is a
valuation in the variable A. The coefficient ci(A) can be given an explicit
expression in terms of JL. This follows from the fact that if x E P(8)
and r ( x) = j then JLi ( {x}) = 1 if i = j and is zero if i =f j.
Consider the case in which JL is an invariant valuation. If so, then
1 1
,LJL(AngB) =, LJL(glAnB)
n. n.
JL(A;B)
9 9
1
, LJL(gA n B) = JL(B; A).
n.
9
Moreover, the coefficients ci(A) are now invariant valuations in the vari
able A. Therefore, Theorem 3.2.4 implies that
n
JL(A; B) = L CijJLi(A)JLj(B).
i,j=l
3.2 Valuations on a simplicial complex 25
Since JL(A; B) = JL(B; A), it is evident that Cij = Cji. It turns out that
most of the constants Cij are equal to zero. In order to compute the
constants Cij explicitly, extend the valuation JL to the Boolean algebra
P(P(8)) generated by L(8), and let (Vi denote the value of JL on a
singleton set in P(P(8)) whose element is a subset of 8 of size i.
Theorem 3.2.5 (The discrete kinematic formula) Suppose that JL
is an invariant valuation on L( 8). For all A, B E L( 8),
Proof Suppose that Xi, Yj C 8 with size i and j respectively. Let A =
{Xi} and B = {Yj}. For any permutation 9 of 8, the set An gB = 0 if
i =f j. If i = j then An gB = 0 if Xi =f gYj. Since there are i!(n  i)!
permutations 9 of 8 such that Xi = gYj (if i = j), we have
1 i'(n  i)' (n)l
JL(A;B) =, LJL(AngB) =. , 'JL(A) = . (Vi
n. n. 2
9
Meanwhile, JLk(A) = 1 if k = i and is equal to zero otherwise. Similarly,
JLk(B) = 1 if k = j and is equal to zero otherwise. Hence,
n
JL(A; B) = L CijJLi(A)JLj(B) = Cij'
i,j=l
Therefore,
if i = j and is equal to zero otherwise. D
We shall be particularly concerned with the case JL = JLo. The discrete
Euler formula (3.11) implies that JLo({xd) = (I)i+I, so that
JLo(A n gB) = t( _1)i+l 1 JLi(A)JLi(B),
for all A, BE L(8).
If x and 'fJ are simplices, then either x n 'fJ is a smaller (nonempty)
simplex, in which case JLo(x n 'fJ) = 1, or x n 'fJ = 0, in which case
26 3 A discrete lattice
Jlo (x n y) = O. The probability that a randomly chosen ksimplex Xk
shall meet a fixed lsimplex Yl can now be computed as follows:
so that
1 n. (n) 1 (l) (k)
n! n gXk) = t;( _1),+1 iii .
(3.14)
The equation (3.14) leads to a notable example of how the discrete
kinematic formula can be used to generate identities for the binomial
coefficients. To generate such an identity, we use elementary probabilis
tic reasoning to compute instead the probability that Yl n gXk = 0, for
a random permutation g. Label the elements of S by {Sl, .. . , Sn} so
that Xk = {Sl, ... ,Sk}. In order for Yl ngxk = 0 to hold, we require
gSl E SYl, of which there are nl choices. There then remain n(l+I)
possible values for gS2, etc., so that there are
(n l)(n lI) (n l k + 1)
choices of values for gSl, ... , gSk. Having chosen these values, there are
n  k possible choices remaining for gSk+1, then n  k 1 possible values
for gSk+2, and so on, up to one possible value remaining for gSn. It
follows that there are
(n l) (n l  k + 1)(n _ k) ... 1 = (n l)!(n  k)!
(n  k l)!
permutations g of S such that Yl n gXk = 0. Hence the probability that
Yl n gXk = 0 for a random permutation g is given by
(n l)!(n  k)! = k!(n  k)!(n l)! = (n)l (n l)
n! (nkl)! n!k!(nkl)! k k'
It now follows from (3.14) that
(3.15)
By adding the term corresponding to i = 0 to both sides of (3.15) and
multiplying by 1 we obtain the following identity:
3.2 Valuations on a simplicial complex 27
Theorem 3.2.6
for all positive integers 0 :::; k, l :::; n. 0
Note that, if k + l > n, then
In the preceding argument this corresponds to the case in which the two
sets Yl and gXk have nonempty overlap for any permutation g, i.e. the
case in which Yl n gXk = 0 with probability zero.
We conclude this discussion of subsets and simplices with an applica
tion of the results of Section 3.1 to a question posed by Spemer. Let
A E (8), and suppose that all ofthe maximal elements of A have rank
kj i.e. suppose that every face of A is contained in a kface of A. Let
[All denote the collection of all lfaces of A, for 0 :::; l :::; k. Is there a
lower bound for the number of lfaces I[Altl, given the number of kfaces
(maximal faces) I[Alkl? The L.Y.M. inequality gives one answer to this
question.
Theorem 3.2.7 Suppose A E (S) such that every maximal element of
A has rank k. For 0 :::; l :::; k,
k!(n  k)!
I[Alti l!(n l)! I[Alkl
Proof Let Bl = PI(S)  [A]t. If Y E Bl then Y cannot be contained in
any x E A. In other words, the set [Alk UBI is an antichain. It then
follows from (3.1) that
Meanwhile,
IBtI = IPI(S)  [Altl = (7) 1[Altl,
so that
28 3 A discrete lattice
It follows that
(
n) (n) 1 k!(n  k)!
I[All! l k I[Alkl = l!(n l)! I[Alkl
o
For example, in the case l = k  1, we have
3.3 A discrete analogue of Helly's theorem
We turn next to a special case and discrete analogue of Helly's theorem,
whose classical geometric version is given in Chapter 5.
Theorem 3.3.1 (The discrete Helly theorem) Let S be a finite set
of size lSI = n, and let F be a family of subsets of s. Suppose that,
for any subset G <:;;: F such that IGI ::; n (that is, every subfamily of
cardinality at most n of F),
n A#0.
AEG
Then
n A#0.
AEF
In other words, if every n elements of F have nonempty intersection,
then the entire family F of subsets has nonempty intersection.
Proof If IFI ::; n the result is trivial.
Suppose that Theorem 3.3.1 holds for IFI = m, for some m n. We
show that the theorem also holds for IFI = m + l.
Write S = {Sl, ... , sn} and F = {AI, ... ,A
m
+
1
}, where Ai <:;;: S. For
each 1 ::; j ::; m + 1 denote by L
j
the intersection
Our induction assumption for the case IFI = m implies that each L
j
is
nonempty. Therefore, there exists Sij E L
j
for each j. However, since
m + 1 > n there must be s E S such that s E Ljl n Liz for some j1 # j2.
Since s E Ljp we have s E Ai for all i # j1. Similarly, s E Ai for all
3.4 Notes 29
i =f j2. Hence,
m+l
sE n A= n A.
i=l AEF
o
3.4 Notes
For a general reference to the theory of lattices and partially ordered
sets, see [92] (also [3, 27,42, 80]). For a graphtheoretic viewpoint, see
[7]. In [84], Schanuel developed the Euler characteristic from a category
theoretic perspective. In [12], Chen extended the Euler characteristic to
linear combinations of indicator functions of unbounded closed convex
sets and unbounded relatively open convex sets. A thorough treatment
of the combinatorial theory of the Euler characteristic appeared in [79,
80].
The face enumerators Jli playa role analogous to that of the intrinsic
volumes on parallelotopes and polyconvex sets (see Sections 4.2 and 7.2).
The discrete basis theorem and kinematic formulas can be extended to
the more general setting of finite vector spaces; see [53].
Sperner's Theorem 3.1.1 first appeared in [91], as did Theorem 3.2.7.
The proof presented in this section is due to Lubell [63]. Meshalkin
proved Theorem 3.1.5 in [73]. In this section we follow a more simpli
fied approach due to Hochberg and Hirsch [45]. The generalization of
Sperner's theorem to rfamilies (Theorem 3.1.2) was originally due to
Erdos [22], but the proof given in this section is due to Harper and Rota
[42].
While Theorem 3.2.7 gives a lower bound to the number of lfaces
of a simplicial complex A, all of whose maximal elements have dimen
sion k, Katona [48] and Kruskal [57] independently obtained a much
stronger result, giving the exact minimum size of [A]l, a minimum that
is independent of the size of the ambient set S. Katona's original paper
may also be found in [27]. For a shorter proof of the KatonaKruskal
theorem, see [3, 7]. A survey of results in extremal set theory, includ
ing generalizations of Sperner's theorem and the L.Y.M. inequality, was
presented in [29].
The discrete Helly Theorem 3.3.1 is a special case of a more general
theorem of convex geometry. This geometric result is treated in greater
detail in Chapter 5 (see also [85, pp. 35]). Helly's original theorem
motivated considerable developments in the field of combinatorial ge
ometry, and 'Hellytype' theorems are now common in many branches
of mathematics [7, 18, 21].
4
The intrinsic volumes for parallelotopes
We develop next a theory of invariant valuations for the lattice of fi
nite unions of orthogonal parallelotopes, having edges parallel to a fixed
frame. Many of the central results in geometric probability can be stated
and proven easily in the context of parallelotopes. For this reason the
lattice of parallelotopes will serve as a model for the more difficult task
of developing a lattice theory for finite unions of compact convex sets in
Rn. The Euler characteristic, intrinsic volumes, and valuation charac
terization theorems for the lattice of parallelotopes will serve as proto
types in Chapters 59 for analogous constructions and characterization
theorems in the more general context of polyconvex sets.
4.1 The lattice of parallelotopes
Choose a Cartesian coordinate system in Rn, which shall remain fixed
throughout this chapter, and let Par(n) denote the family of sets that
are obtained by taking finite unions and intersections of orthogonal par
allelotopes (i.e. rectilinear boxes), with sides parallel to the coordinate
axes. If P E Par(n), we shall say that P is of dimension n (or has full
dimension) if P is not contained in a finite union of hyperplanes of Rn;
that is, if P has a nonempty interior. Otherwise, we shall say that
P is of lower dimension. (Recall that a hyperplane in R
n
is a plane
of dimension n  1, not necessarily through the origin.) In general,
a set P E Par( n) has dimension k if P is contained in a finite union
of kplanes in R n, but is not contained in any finite union of k  1
planes.
Note that Par( n) is closed under finite unions and intersections. This
follows from the basic fact that the intersection of two parallelotopes is
a parallelotope. In other words, Par(n) is a distributive lattice.
4.1 The lattice of parallelotopes 31
Denote by Tn the group generated by translations and permutations
of coordinates in Rn. For A Rn and 9 E Tn, write
gA = g(A) = {g(a) : a E A}.
A valuation f..L defined on Par( n) is said to be invariant when
f..L(gP) = f..L(P) (4.1)
for all 9 E Tn and all P E Par(n). If f..L(gP) = f..L(P) is known to hold
only for translations 9 of R n, then we shall say that f..L is translation
invariant.
The object of this section is to determine all invariant valuations de
fined on Par( n). To avoid pathological cases, we shall impose a continu
ity condition on the valuations to be considered.
For A Rn and x E R
n
, the distance d(x, A) from the point x to the
set A is given by
d(x, A) = inf d(x, a),
aEA
where d(x, a) = Ix  al is the usual distance between points in Rn. Note
that d(x, A) = 0 if x E A or if x is a limit point of A.
For K,L Rn, the Hausdorff distance 8(K,L) is defined by
8(K, L) = max (sup d(a, L), supd(b, K)) . (4.2)
aEK bEL
If K and L are compact, then 8(K,L) = 0 if and only if K = L. A
sequence of compact subsets Kn of Rn converges to a set K, or Kn +
K, if 8(Kn' K) + 0 as n t 00.
Let Bn denote the unit ball in Rn. For K Rn compact and f > 0,
define
K + fB
n
= {x + EU : x E K and u E Bn}.
The following lemma gives an easier and more practical way to think
about the distance 8.
Lemma 4.1.1 Let K, L Rn be compact sets. Then 8(K, L) ::::; f if and
only if K L + fB
n
and L K + fB
n
.
Proof Suppose that K L + fBn. For x E K there exist y ELand
u E Bn such that x = y + EU. In other words, Ix  yl ::::; f, so that
d(x, L) ::::; f. Similarly, if L K + fBn, then d(y, K) ::::; f for all y E L.
Therefore, 8(K, L) ::::; f.
32 4 The intrinsic volumes for parallelotopes
Meanwhile, if there exists x E K such that x 1:. L + fBn (or vice versa),
then Ix  yl > f for all y E L, so that 8(K, L) ;::: d(x, L) > f. 0
In view of Lemma 4.1.1, we see that a sequence of compact subsets
Kn t K, if for f > 0 there exists N > 0 such that K c:;:: Ki + fBn and
Ki c:;:: K + fBn whenever i > N.
Theorem 4.1.2 The distance 8 defines a metric on the set of all compact
subsets ofRn.
Proof The distance 8 is clearly symmetric and nonnegative. To verif:Y
the triangle inequality, suppose that K, L, M c:;:: Rn are compact. Let
fl = 8(K, M) and f2 = 8(L, M). By Lemma 4.1.1, K c:;:: M + f1Bn and
M c:;:: L + f2Bn' so that
K c:;:: L + f2Bn + f1Bn = L + (f2 + fdBn.
,
Similarly, L c:;:: K +(f2+fl)Bn. Lemma 4.1.1 then implies that 8(K, L) :s;
fl + f2. 0
We now focus once again on the lattice Par( n) of finite unions of par
allelotopes. A valuation f..L is said to be continuous on Par(n), provided
that
whenever Pi, P are parallelotopes (and not just finite unions) and Pi t
P.
Another condition that will prove useful is monotonicity. A valua
tion f..L is said to be increasing on Par(n), provided that f..L(P) :s; f..L(Q),
whenever P, Q E Par(n) and P c:;:: Q. Similarly one defines decreasing
valuations. A valuation f..L is said to be monotone on Par(n), if f..L is either
an increasing valuation or a decreasing valuation.
When studying valuations on Par(n) we may restrict our attention
to the generating set of parallelotopes in R n with edges parallel to the
coordinate axes. we have the following extension theorem.
Theorem 4.1.3 (Groemer's extension theorem for Par(n)) A val
uation f..L defined on parallelotopes with edges parallel to the coordinate
axes admits a unique extension to a valuation on the lattice Par( n).
Proof In view of Groemer's integral Theorem 2.2.1, it is sufficient to
show that f..L defines an integral on the space of indicator functions of
parallelotopes.
4.1 The lattice of parallelotopes 33
The proposition is trivial in dimension zero. Assume that the propo
sition holds in dimension n  1. Suppose that there exist distinct paral
lelotopes PI, ... , Pm such that
m
LaJPi =0
(4.3)
i=l
while
m
L aiJ.l(Pi ) = 1.
(4.4)
i=l
Let k be the number of parallelotopes Pi in the expressions above of
full dimension n, and suppose that k is minimal over all possible such
expressions.
If k = 0 then PI, ... , Pm are each contained inside a hyperplane. Let l
denote the (finite) number of hyperplanes containing the parallelotopes
PI"'" Pm, and suppose that l is minimal over all such expressions.
If l = 1 then PI,'" , Pm are all contained in a single hyperplane.
It then follows from the induction assumption (on the dimension of the
ambient Euclidean space) that we have a contradiction. Therefore l > 1,
and there exist hyperplanes HI"'" HI, orthogonal to the coordinate
axes, such that Pi HI U ... U Hz for i = 1, ... ,m. Suppose, without
loss of generality, that PI HI.
Since IpinHl = IpJHll it follows from (4.3) that
Meanwhile,
m
L aJpinHl = O.
i=l
m
L aiJ.l(Pi n Hd = 0,
i=l
(4.5)
(4.6)
by the induction assumption on dimension, since each Pi n HI HI, a
hyperplane.
Subtracting equations (4.5) and (4.6) from (4.3) and (4.4) respectively,
we have
and
m
m
L ai(Ipi  IpinHJ = 0,
i=l
L ai(J.l(Pi ) , J.l(Pi n HI)) = 1.
i=l
(4.7)
(4.8)
34 4 The intrinsic volumes for parallelotopes
Since PI n HI = PI, equations (4.7) and (4.8) take the form of (4.3)
and (4.4), where the nonzero terms involve parallelotopes Pi in at most
l  1 hyperplanes, contradicting the minimality of l.
It follows that k 2: 1. Suppose then that PI has dimension n. Choose
a hyperplane H, with associated closed halfspaces H+ and H such
that PI n H is a facet of PI, oriented so that PI c H+. Since I Pi nH + =
Ip,!H+, it follows from (4.3) that
Similarly,
m
L <Xi1pinH+ = O.
i=l
m m
L<XilpinH = 0 and L<xJpinH = o.
i=l i=l
Meanwhile, since JL is a valuation,
m m m m
i=l i=l i=l i=l
Since the sets Pi n H lie inside a space of dimension n  1, the sum
2::1 <XiJL(P
i
n H) = 0 by the induction assumption. Because PI n H
has dimension n 1, the sum 2::1 <XiJL(P
i
nH) = 0 by the minimality
of k. From (4.4) we have
m m
i=l i=l
There are n hyperplanes HI"'" Hn such that
n
By iterating the preceding argument, we have
m
L <XiJL(Pi n Hi n n H:}:) = 1,
i=l
so that
m
L <XiJL(Pi n Pd = 1,
i=l
while a similar argument using (4.3) gives
m
L<XiIPinPl = O.
i=l
4.2 Invariant valuations on parallelotopes 35
After repeating this argument with parallelotopes P
2
, . , Pm we have
n .. nPm) = Jl(PI n .. nPm) = 1.
This implies that al + .. +am =f and that PIn npm =f 0. Meanwhile
a similar argument using (4.3) gives
f aJp1n ... nP
m
= (f ai ) Ipln ... nPm = 0,
i=l i=l
so that either al + ... + am = or PI n n Pm = 0, a contradiction in
either case. 0
4.2 Invariant valuations on parallelotopes
To begin the classification of invariant valuations on Par(n), consider
the problem in RI. An element of Par(l) is a finite union of closed
intervals. Set
Jl6(A) = number of connected components of A,
= length of A.
One easily verifies that Jl6 and are both continuous invariant valua
tions on Par(l). We shall prove that every continuous invariant valuation
on Par(l) is a linear combination of Jl6 and Jll.
Suppose that Jl is a continuous invariant valuation on Par(l). Let
c = Jl(A) , where A is a set consisting of a single point in Rl, and let
Jl' = Jl  CJl6 Note that the invariant valuation Jl' vanishes on points.
Define a continuous function f : [0, +00) t [0, +00) by the equation
f(x) = Jl'([0, x]).
If A is a closed interval of length x, then the invariance of Jl' implies
that Jl'(A) = f(x). If A and B are closed intervals of length x and y,
such that An B is a point, then
f(x + y) = Jl'(A U B) = Jl'(A) + Jl'(B)  Jl'(A n B) = f(x) + f(y),
so that f(x) = rx for some constant r. Hence, Jl' = rJlL and our
assertion is proved.
We now turn to Rn. There is one well known continuous invariant
valuation defined on Par(n), namely, the volume. Denote by Jln(P) the
volume of a finite union P of parallelotopes of dimension n.
36 4 The intrinsic volumes for parallelotopes
Recall that the elementary symmetric functions of Xl, X2, ... ,X
n
are
the polynomials
eo = 1,
n
ek(XI, X2, ,Xn) = L Xi1Xi2 .. , Xik' 1 :S k :S n.
l:'Oh < .. <ik:'On
We shall prove the following theorem.
Theorem 4.2.1 For 0 :S k :S n, there exists a unique continuous val
uation fJk on Par(n), invariant under translations and permutations of
coordinates, such that
(4.9)
whenever P is a parallelotope with sides of length Xl, X2, ... ,Xn
For example, fJn(P) is the volume of P, if P has dimension n.
Proof Let fJ6 and be the valuations previously defined on R I, and
let fJf = fJ6 + where t is a variable. Consider the product valuation
on Rn, given by the nfold product
(4.10)
Because a parallelotope in Par(n) is a Cartesian product of line seg
ments, fJf defines a valuation on parallelotopes. By Groemer's extension
Theorem 4.1.3, fJf then extends to a valuation on all of Par(n).
Let us compute the value of fJf on the parallelotope P with edges of
length Xl, X2, ... , X
n
. Since P = h X 12 x x In, where Ij is an interval
of length Xj, the definition (4.10) implies that
(4.11)
Meanwhile
fJ}(Ij) = fJ6(Ij) + = 1 + tXj.
By expanding the righthand side of (4.11), we obtain
(1 + txd(l + tX2) ... (1 + tXn)
1 + el(xI, ... xn)t + e2(xI, ... xn)t
2
+ ... + en(xI, ... Xn)t
n
.
Now let Q E Par(n). The set Q can be expressed as a union Q =
PI U P
2
U ... U P
n
, where the Pi are parallelotopes. (Recall that the
4.2 Invariant valuations on parallelotopes 37
intersection of a collection of parallelotopes is a parallelotope.) By the
incl usionexcl usion principle,
=  n Pj ) + ...  ....
i i<j
Collecting terms in each power of t, we conclude that there exist valua
tions JLo, JLI, ... ,JLn such that
where the valuations JLi are uniquely determined by the identities (4.9).
o
Note that, if the parallelotope P has dimension k < n, then the valu
ation JLi(P) has an ambiguous sense. It may indicate the value of JLi(P)
in Rn as defined in the previous theorem, but it may also denote the
value of JLi(P) when computed within a lower dimensional plane con
taining P (and isomorphic to R
m
, where k :s; m < n). It is a notable
consequence of the preceding theorem that the two valuations coincide.
In other words,
JL7'(P) = JL7(P).
Therefore, there will be no need to indicate the dependence of JLi(P) on
the space R
n
in which the parallelotope P is embedded. We summarize
this remarkable fact as follows.
Theorem 4.2.2 The valuations JLi on Par(n) are normalized indepen
dently of the dimension n. 0
In other words, the value JLk(P) is 'intrinsic' to the set P, and in
dependent of the dimension of the ambient space. For this reason the
valuation JLk is called the kth intrinsic volume.
The valuation JLo is called the Euler characteristic. As a corollary
of Theorem 4.2.1, we see that the Euler characteristic is the only
valuation on Par(n) that takes the value 1 on all (nonempty) paral
lelotopes:
Let HI and H2 be complementary orthogonal subspaces ofRn spanned
by subsets of the given coordinate system and having dimensions hand
n  h, respectively. Let Pi be a parallelotope in Hi and let P = PI X
P
2
. The intrinsic volumes satisfy the following property with regard to
orthogonal Cartesian products.
38 4 The intrinsic volumes for parallelotopes
Proposition 4.2.3
f.li(PI x P2 ) = L f.lr (Pdf.ls (P2 ).
(4.12)
r+s=i
The identity (4.12) is therefore valid when PI and P
2
are finite unions
of parallelotopes.
Proof Suppose that PI has sides of length Xl, ... ,Xh and P
2
has sides
of length YI, ... , Ynh. Then we have
r+s=i
Let jr+l = kl + h, ... ,ji = jr+s = ks + h, and let Xh+1 = YI,, Xn =
Ynh. Then
r+s=i
X X X X
Jl Jr Jr+l Ji
o
A valuation f.l on Par(n) is said to be simple if f.l(P) = for all P of
dimension less than n. The restriction of the volume f.ln to the lattice
Par( n) is characterized by the following theorem.
Theorem 4.2.4 (The volume theorem for Par(n Let f.l be a trans
lation invariant simple valuation defined on Par(n), and suppose that f.l
is either continuous or monotone. Then there exists C E R such that
f.l(P) = Cf.ln(P) for all P E Par(n); that is, f.l is equal to the volume, up
to a constant factor.
Proof Let [0,1]n denote the unit cube in Rn, and let C = f.l([0,1]n).
Recall that f.l is translation invariant and vanishes on lower dimen
sions. Since f.l([0, 1]n) = c, a simple cutandpaste argument shows that
4.2 Invariant valuations on parallelotopes 39
fL([O, 1/k]n) = c/k
n
for all integers k > O. Therefore, fL(C) = CfLn(C) for
every box C of rational dimensions, with sides parallel to the coordinate
axes. This follows from the fact that such a box can be built up by
stacking cubes of the form [0,1/k]n for some k > O. Since fL is either
continuous or monotone, it follows that fL( C) = CfLn (C) for every box C
of positive real dimensions, with sides parallel to the coordinate axes. It
then follows from the inclusionexclusion principle that fL(P) = cfLn(P)
for all P E Par(n). 0
The condition of either continuity or monotonicity is necessary to the
characterization given by Theorem 4.2.4. If we omit these conditions
then counterexamples to Theorem 4.2.4 can be found even in the case of
Par(1)! To see this, recall that R is a vector space of infinite dimension
over the field Q of rational numbers. Denote this vector space RQ.
Since the dual space RQ is also of infinite dimension, there exists a
nontrivial map f E RQ; i.e., a linear map f : RQ ., Q such that
f(1) = 1 and f(x) E Q for all x E R.
A parallelotope P E Par(1) is just a closed bounded interval of the
form [a, b], having length b  a. Define a valuation TJ on parallelotopes
(intervals) in Par(1) by the formula
TJ([a, b]) = f(b  a).
Evidently TJ is invariant, depending only on the length of the closed
interval. Moreover, if a C b d, then
TJ([a, b] U [c, dj) + TJ([a, b] n [c, dj)
= TJ([a, d]) + TJ([c, b])
= f(d  a) + f(b  c)
= (f(c  a) + f(b  c) + f(d  b)) + f(b  c)
=f(ba)+f(dc)
= TJ([a, b]) + TJ([c, dj),
by the linearity of f. It now follows from Groemer's extension The
orem 4.1.3 that TJ extends to an invariant valuation on Par(1) that
vanishes on lower dimensions. However, TJ is not equal to length (one
dimensional volume), since TJ takes only rational values. In other words,
invariance alone is insufficient to characterize the volume  either conti
nuity or monotonicity is also required. The reasoning that underlies this
counterexample to Theorem 4.2.4 is easily extended to provide coun
terexamples for Par( n), where n 2: 1.
40 4 The intrinsic volumes for parallelotopes
We are now able to determine all continuous valuations on Par(n)
that are invariant under translation and permutations of coordinates.
We shall not yet prove that they are also rotation invariant.
Theorem 4.2.5 The valuations /Lo, /Ll, . ,/Ln form a basis for the vec
tor space of all continuous invariant valuations defined on Par(n).
Proof Let /L be a continuous invariant valuation on Par(n). Denote
by Xl, X2, ... ,X
n
the standard orthonormal basis for R n, and let H
j
denote the (n I)hyperplane in Rn spanned by the coordinate vectors
Xl, ... , X j 1 , X j +1, ... , Xn The restriction of /L to H
j
is an invariant
valuation on parallelotopes in H
j
. Proceeding by induction, we may
assume that
nl
/L(A) = L Ci/Li(A),
i=O
for all A E Par( n) such that A Hj . Moreover, the coefficients <;i are
the same for each choice of H
j
, since the valuations /L; /Lo, ... , /Lnl are
invariant under permutation of the coordinates Xl, . , X
n
. Thus, the
valuation
nl
/L LCi/Li
i=O
vanishes on all lower dimensional parallelotopes in Par(n), since any
such parallelotope is contained in a hyperplane parallel to one of the
hyperplanes H
j
. By Theorem 4.2.4,
nl
/L  L Ci/Li = Cn/Ln,
i=O
where /Ln is the volume on Rn, and where C
n
is a real constant. In other
words,
n
/L = LCi/Li.
i=O
o
A valuation /L on Par(n) is said to be homogeneous of degree k > 0
if
/L(aP) = ak/L(P)
for all P E Par(n) and all a 2: o.
4.3 Notes 41
Corollary 4.2.6 Let fl be a continuous invariant valuation defined on
Par(n) that is homogeneous of degree k, for some 0::; k ::; n. Then there
exists C E R such that fl(P) = Cflk(P) for all P E Par(n).
Proof By Theorem 4.2.5 there exist Cl,"" C
n
E R such that
If P = [0, l]n then, for a > 0,
n
fl = LCifli.
i=O
fl(aP) = = = (7)Ciai
Meanwhile,
fl(aP) = akfl(P) = a
k
= (7)Ciak
Therefore, Ci = if i =f. k, and fl = Ckflk
4.3 Notes
o
For a more complete discussion of the Hausdorff topology on the space of
compact subsets of Rn and the subspace of compact convex sets, see [85,
pp. 4761]. Theorem 4.1.3 is a special case of a more general extension
theorem of Groemer, in which the lattice Par(n) is replaced with the
lattice of polytopes in Rn (see [32]). Theorem 4.2.5 can be generalized
to a classification of all continuous translation invariant valuations on
the lattice Par(n) , omitting the requirement that valuations be invariant
under permutation of coordinates. The result is a 2
n
dimensional space
of valuations, with a basis indexed by the collection of all coordinate
subspaces of Rn with respect to the fixed basis for parallelotope edges
in Par(n); that is, by the set of all 2
n
subsets of that nelement basis.
For a detailed treatment, see [54].
5
The lattice of polyconvex sets
We turn now to the lattice of polyconvex sets, which is a natural setting
for the study of classical geometric probability. In Section 5.2 we define
the Euler characteristic on polyconvex sets, which is an important tool
for the extension in Chapter 7 of the intrinsic volumes of Section 4.2 to
polyconvex sets. The Euler characteristic will also reappear in Chap
ter 10, in which we generalize the discrete kinematic formula of Chap
ter 3 to polyconvex sets. Section 5.5, while interesting in its own right,
points to the correct normalization of the rotation invariant measures
on Grassmannians in Section 6.1.
5.1 Polyconvex sets
A subset K of Rn is said to be convex if any two points x and y in
K are the endpoints of a line segment lying inside K. Denote by Kn
the collection of all compact convex subsets of R n. A finite union of
compact convex sets will be called a polyconvex set (a term suggested
by E. De Giorgi).
If A is a polyconvex set in Rn, we shall say that A is of dimension
n if A is not contained in a finite union of hyperplanes of R n; that
is, if A has a nonempty interior. Otherwise, we shall say that A is
of lower dimension. The union and intersection of polyconvex sets are
polyconvex. This follows from the basic fact that the intersection oftwo
convex sets is convex. In other words, the family of polyconvex sets in
Rn is a distributive lattice. We denote this lattice Polycon(n). Note
that Par( n) is a sub lattice of Polycon( n). The lattice Polycon( n) is also
sometimes called the convex ring.
A nonempty compact convex set K E Kn is determined uniquely
by its support function hK : snl + R, defined by hK(U) =
5.1 Poly convex sets 43
maxXEK{ x . u}, where denotes the standard inner product on Rn. For
example, if vERn and v denotes the line segment with endpoints v and
v, then hv(u) = lu vi, for all u E snl.
More generally, suppose that h: snl + R, and consider the radial
extension h : Rn + R given by h(au) = ah(u), for all u E snl and
a 2': O. The original function h is a support fUEction of a compact convex
set in Rn if and only if the radial extension h is sublinear; that is,
h(x + y) h(x) + h(y),
for all x,y ERn.
Note that, for u E snl, a compact convex set K lies entirely on
one side (the 'u' side) of the hyperplane H(K, u) determined by the
equation X u = hK(U). The hyperplane H(K,u) is called the support
plane of K in the direction u. If H(K, u) denotes the closed halfspace
x u hK(U) bounded by H(K, u), then we have
K = n H(K,u).
uES
n
For compact convex sets K and L the Minkowski sum K + L is defined
by
K + L = {x + y : x E K and y E L}. (5.1)
It is not difficult to show that hK+L = hK + hL .
Recall from Lemma 4.1.1 that for compact sets K and L in Rn, the
Hausdorff metric satisfies d(K, L) E if and only if K L + EB and
L K + EB. It follows easily from (5.1) that
8(K, L) = sup IhK(U)  hL{u)l. (5.2)
uES
n

1
In other words, the Hausdorff topology on Kn is also given by the uniform
metric topology on the set of support functions of compact convex sets.
Denote by En the Euclidean group on Rn; that is, the group generated
by translations and (proper or improper) rotations. If A C Rn and
9 E En, write
gA = g(A) = {g(a) : a E A}.
The subgroup of translations (relative to a fixed Cartesian coordinate
system) shall be denoted by Tn.
A valuation Jl defined on polyconvex sets in Rn is said to be rigid
motion invariant (or simply invariant, when no confusion is possible) if
Jl(A) = Jl(gA) (5.3)
44 5 The lattice of polyconvex sets
for all 9 E En and all A E Polycon(n). If the equality (5.3) holds only
when 9 E Tn, we say that J.L is translation invariant.
Our objective is to determine all invariant valuations defined on poly
convex sets in Rn. As with Par(n), we impose a continuity condition
on the valuations to be considered. A valuation J.L is said to be convex
continuous (or simply continuous, when no confusion is possible) pro
vided that
whenever An, A are compact convex sets and An + A with respect
to the metric (5.2). Examples of continuous invariant valuations on
Polycon(n) include volume and surface area. The following proposition
shows that we can restrict our attention to convexcontinuous valuations
defined on the generating set Kn.
Theorem 5.1.1 (Groemer's extension theorem for Polycon(n
A convexcontinuous valuation J.L on Kn admits a unique extension to a
valuation on the lattice Polycon( n).
Proof Suppose that J.L is a continuous valuation. In view of Groemer's
integral Theorem 2.2.1, it is sufficient to show that J.L defines an integral
on the space of indicator functions.
The theor,em is trivial in dimension Assume that the theorem
holds in dimension n1. Suppose that there exist distinct K
1
, . ,Km E
Kn such that
while
LaJKi =0
i=l
Tn
L aiJ.L(Ki) = 1.
i=l
(5.4)
(5.5)
Let m be the least positive integer for which such expressions (5.4)
and (5.5) exist.
Choose a hyperplane H, with associated closed halfspaces H+ and
H such that Kl C lnt H+. Since I
KinH
+ = IKJH+, it follows
from (5.4) that
Tn
LaiIKinH+ = O.
i=l
5.1 Polyconvex sets
Similarly,
m
L cxiIK,nH = 0 and
i=l
Meanwhile, since Jl is a valuation,
m m m
i=l i=l i=l
m
LCXJK,nH = O.
i=l
m
i=l
45
Since the sets Ki n H lie inside a space of dimension n  1, the sum
cxiJl(KinH) = 0 by the induction assumption. Because KlnH =
0, the sum cxiJl(Ki n H) = 0 by the minimality of m. From (5.5)
we have
m m
i=l i=l
Choose a sequence of hyperplanes HI, H
2
, ... such that Kl C lnt Hi
and
By iterating the preceding argument, we have
m
LCXiJl(Ki n Hi n n H:) = 1
i=l
for all q 2: 1. Since Jl is continuous, the limit as q (Xl gives
m
L cxiJl(Ki n Kl ) = 1,
i=l
while a similar argument using (5.4) gives
m
L cxiIK,nK
1
= O.
i=l
After repeating this argument with the bodies K
2
, . . ,Km we have
tCXiJl(Kl n n Km) = (tCXi) Jl(Kl n n Km) = l.
This implies that CXl + .,. + CXm =I 0 and that Kl n .. , n Km =I 0.
Meanwhile a similar argument using (5.4) gives
f CXJK1n ... nKm = (f CXi ) IKln ... nKm = 0,
i=l ,=1
46 5 The lattice of polyconvex sets
so that either a1 + ... + am = 0 or K1 n ... n Km = 0, a contradiction
in either case. 0
5.2 The Euler characteristic
Next, we shall extend the valuation Jlo to the entire distributive lat
tice Polycon(n). We have seen that Jlo is a welldefined functional on
sets that are finite unions and intersections of parallelotopes, and that
Jlo(P) = 1 if P is a nonempty parallelotope. These results motivate the
following theorem.
Theorem 5.2.1 (The existence of the Euler characteristic)
There exists a unique convexcontinuous invariant valuation Jlo de
fined on the family Polycon(n) of all polyconvex sets in Rn, such that
Jlo(K) = 1 whenever K is a nonempty compact convex set.
The valuation Jlo is again called the Euler characteristic.
Proof We proceed by induction on the dimension n, the case n = 1
having been established previously. By Theorems 2.2.1 and 5.1.1, it will
suffice to establish the existence of a linear functional Ln defined on
Knsimple functions, such that Ln(IK) = 1 whenever K is a nonempty
compact convex set.
For n = 1, set
L 1 (1) = L(I(x)f(x+O)),
xER
where f(x + 0) = lima+o+ f(x + a). The sum on the righthand side is
finite, and, for f = I
K
, where K is an interval [a, bj, we have
Thus, L1(I
K
) = Jl6(K), so that
L 1(1) = J f dJl6
For arbitrary n, choose an orthogonal coordinate system Xl, X2,"" x
n
.
Given the first coordinate x, let Hx be the hyperplane parallel to the
coordinates X2, ... , Xn and passing through the point (x, 0, ... ,0).
Let f = f(X1, X2,"" x
n
) be a simple function. The function
fx(X2,' .. ,x
n
) = f(x, X2,' .. ,x
n
) is a simple function in H
x
, and we
5.2 The Euler characteristic 47
assume that L
n

l
(fx) has been defined in H
x
, since Hx is isomorphic
to Rnl. Set F(x) = Lnl(fx), and set
Note that the function F is simple, so that the righthand side is well
defined.
If f = I
K
, where K is a compact convex set, then fx is the indicator
function of the slice of K by the hyperplane at Xl = X, and F is the
indicator function of the projection of K onto the xlcoordinate axis. It
follows that Ll (F) = 1. Since
Ln(f) = J f d'/a,
for some valuation f.lo, it follows that f.lo is the desired valuation. 0
Note that the Euler characteristic f.lo is normalized. In other words,
if K is a polyconvex set of dimension k in R n, and if V is a plane of
dimension j containing K, then computed within V is equal to
f.lo(K) computed in Rn. This follows from the fact that f.lo(K) can
be computed via the inclusionexclusion principle after K has been ex
pressed as a finite union of compact convex sets, whereas f.lo(K) = 1 for
all nonempty compact convex sets K in spaces of any (finite) dimension.
For this reason we write f.lo in place of f.lo.
The argument in the preceding proof can also be used to compute the
Euler characteristic of a polytope. By Corollary 2.2.2, the valuation f.lo
extends uniquely to a valuation defined on the relative Boolean algebra
generated by Polycon(n), a valuation that is again denoted by f.lo.
Consider the (smaller) distributive sublattice ofPolycon(n) generated
by compact convex polytopes. Recall that a convex polytope is the
intersection of a finite collection of closed halfspaces. A polytope is a
finite union of convex polytopes. Given a polytope P, the boundary 8P
is also a polytope (which is not the case for an arbitrary compact convex
set). Therefore, f.lo(8P) is defined.
Theorem 5.2.2 If P is a compact convex polytope of dimension n > 0,
then
Proof Using again the notation of Theorem 5.2.1, we note that H
x
n8 P =
8( Hx n P) if X is not a boundary point of 1f P, the orthogonal projection
48 5 The lattice of polyconvex sets
of P onto the line H;:. Let F(x) = Jlo(o(Hx np)), where Jlo is taken in
the space Hx.
For the case n = 1 we have Jlo(oP) = 2 = 1 (1), since OP consists
of two distinct points. For n > 1 it follows from the induction hypothesis
that
when x E nP is not a boundary point of nP. Meanwhile, if x E o(nP),
we have
Jlo(Hx n oP) = 1,
since Hx n P is a face of P (though possibly a single point). Finally,
Jlo(Hx n oP) = 0,
when Hx n oP = 0.
We can now compute
L1(F(x)) =  F(x + 0)),
x
a sum that vanishes except at the two points, call them a and b (with
a < b), where Hx touches the boundary of P. The righthand side then
reduces to
We compute
F(a)  F(a + 0) + F(b)  F(b + 0).
F(b+ 0) = 0,
F(b) = 1,
F(a) = 1,
F(a+O) = 1 (_I)nl.
On adding, we find that
Ll(F(x)) = 11 + (_I)nl + 1 = 1 + (_I)nl = 1 (_I)n,
as desired o
If P is a compact convex polytope of dimension k in R n, let V be the
kdimensional plane containing P. We denote by relint(P) the interior
of P relative to the topology of V; that is, the relative interior of P.
5.2 The Euler characteristic 49
Theorem 5.2.3 Let P be a compact convex polytope of dimension k in
Rn. Then
1L0(relint(P)) = (_l)k.
Proof Since 1L0 is normalized independently of the ambient space, we
compute within the kdimensional plane in Rn containing P. From
Theorem 5.2.2 we have
1L0(relint(P = 1L0(P) 1L0(8P) = (_l)k.
o
We can now generalize Euler's formula to arbitrary (nonconvex) poly
topes. To this end, we define the notion of a system of faces F of a
polytope P. This will be a family with the following properties:
Every element of F is a convex polytope.
UQEF relint(Q) = P .
If Q, Q' E F and Q =I Q', then relint(Q) n relint(Q') = 0
We can now prove the following result.
Theorem 5.2.4 (The EulerSchliifliPoincare formula) Let F be
a system of faces of a polytope P, and let fi be the number of elements
of F of dimension i. Then
1L0 = fo ; II + h  ...
First proof Place a linear ordering on the elements of F, or 'faces', such
that, if Q < Q' then flim(Q) ::; dim(Q'). Evidently,
Ip = L (IQ  lQ1)'
QEF
where Q1 = Q n (UQI<QQ'). Note that lQ  lQ1 = l
Q
_Q1 is the
indicator of the set of points of R n belonging to the face Q, but not to
any of the preceding faces.
The sum on the righthand side can be simplified as follows. Let Fi
be the set of all faces of P of dimension i. Then
l dlLo L J(IQ  lQ1) dlLo + L J (IQ  lQ1) dlLo
QEFo QEF1
+ L J (IQ  l Q1 ) dlLo + ...
QEF2
50 5 The lattice of polyconvex sets
For Q E F
o
, we have IQl = 0, so that
For Q E F
i
, where i > 0, we have
and hence,
Therefore,
so that
Ql = Q n ( U Q
1
) = 8Q,
Q'<Q
f.Lo(Q)  f.Lo(8Q) = 1  (1  (_l)i)
ll+(l)i=(lt
L J (fQ  IQ,) df.Lo = (_l)i Ii,
QEFi
f.Lo(P) = J Ip df.Lo = fo  h + h  ....
o
Second proof We use the relative interior theorem. This requires ex
tending the valuation f.Lo to the relative Boolean algebra generated by
polyconvex sets. If F is any system of faces, then
f.Lo(P) = f.Lo ( U relint(Q)) = L f.Lo(relint(Q))
QEF QEF
L (_l)dimQ
QEF
by Theorem 5.2.3, since each Q E F is a convex polytope. We collect
terms of the same dimension, and the theorem then follows. 0
5.3 Helly's theorem
The following is a remarkable application of the Euler characteristic.
5.3 H elly' s theorem 51
Theorem 5.3.1 (Klee's theorem) Let F be a finite family of compact
convex sets such that
is convex. Let i < IFI, and suppose that, for any subset G F such
that IGI = i (that is, every subset of cardinality i of F),
n K=I 0.
KEG
Then there exists a subset H of F with cardinality i + 1, such that
n K=I 0.
KEH
Proof Let n > 1 be a positive integer. Recall that
1 (7) + (;)  + ... +(l)j(;) =1O, (5.6)
for all positive integers j < n. To see why (5.6) holds, suppose that
j (n/2). In this case the lefthand side of (5.6) is an alternating sum
of strictly increasing terms, and is therefore unequal to zero. Since
and
it also follows that (5.6) holds if we replace j (n/2) by j ::::: (n/2).
Now let n = IFI. From Theorem 5.2.1 and the inclusionexclusion
formula we have
l=flO (U K)
KEF
L flo (K)  L flo (K n L) + ...
KEF K#LEF
whenever nKEG K = 0 for all G F such that IGI = i + 1. However,
this is impossible, by virtue of the inequality (5.6). 0
Given a set A Rn, the convex hull of A is the smallest convex set in
R n that contains A; that is, the intersection of all convex sets containing
52 5 The lattice of polyconvex sets
A. The following is a simple and yet fundamental property of convex
hulls in Rn.
Theorem 5.3.2 (Caratheodory's theorem) Let T be the convex hull
of a family of compact convex sets K
1
, K
2
, .. ,Km in Rn. For each
x E T, there exists a subfamily Kjl' ... ' Kjp ' with convex hull T
x
, such
that p n + 1 and x E T x.
Proof If n = 0 the result is trivial. Assuming that the theorem holds
for dimension n  1, we prove the theorem for dimension n.
Let x E T. If x lies on the boundary of the compact convex set T, let
H denote a support plane of T at x. Because H supports the convex
set T, all of T lies inside one of the closed halfspaces bounded by H.
Since x E T n H, it follows that x lies in the convex hull of the convex
sets K
j
n H. By the induction assumption on dimension, there exists a
subfamily Kl1 n H, ... ,Kjp n H with convex hull T* such that p n
and x E T*. It follows that x lies in the convex hull of the subfamily
Kj1 , ... ,Kjp.
If x lies in the interior of T, suppose that x rj. K
j
for any j (otherwise
the proof is finished). Let denote a line through x that also meets
K
m
, and let x' be the point of intersection of with the boundary of T.
Since meets the boundary of T at two points, choose x' so that x lies
between x' and n Km. It follows from the argument in the previous
paragraph that x' lies in the convex hull of a subfamily Kjl , ... ,Kjp of
F, where p n. It then follows that x must lie the convex hull of the
sets Kj1 , ... ,Kjp ' Km, a collection of at most n + 1 sets in F. 0
Combining CaratModory's Theorem 5.3.2 with Klee's Theorem 5.3.1
we obtain the following celebrated theorem of Helly.
Theorem 5.3.3 (Helly's theorem) Let F be a finite family of compact
convex sets in Rn. Suppose that, for any subset G F such that IGI
n + 1 (that is, every subset of cardinality at most n + 1 of F),
n K#0.
KEG
Then
n K#0.
KEF
5.3 Helly's theorem 53
In other words, if every n + 1 elements of F have nonempty intersec
tion, then the entire family F of convex sets has nonempty intersection.
Proof If IFI n + 1 the result is trivial. Suppose that Theorem 5.3.3
holds for IFI = m, for some m 2': n + 1. We show that the theorem also
holds for IFI = m + 1.
Let F = {K
1
, ... , K
mH
}. For each 1 j m + 1 denote by L
j
the
intersection
Our induction assumption for the case IFI = m implies that each L
j
is
nonempty. Let M denote the convex hull of the union L1 u u L
m
+1.
If x E M then Caratheodory's Theorem 5.3.2 implies that x lies in
the convex hull of the union Lil U Li2 U ... U Lin+l for some 1 i1
... in+ 1 m + 1. For each i :. {iI, ... , in+ I},
so that x E K
i
. In other words,
m+1
M S;; U Ki
i=l
Let Mi = Ki n M for 1 i m + 1. Note that, for each j,
n Mi = n Ki n M = Lj n M = Lj =I 0.
ifj ifj
Since M1 U ... U Mm+1 = M is convex, it follows from Klee's Theo
rem 5.3.1 that
Hence,
m+1 m+1
n Ki;2 n Mi =I 0.
i=l i=l
o
Theorem 5.3.3 is in fact a generalization of Theorem 3.3.1. To see
this, suppose that S = {Sl' ... ,sn} is a finite set, and associate to each
Si a distinct point Xi E Rnl, chosen so that the collection {Xl, ... ,x
n
}
is affinely independent. Let denote the geometric simplex in R
n

1
having vertices {Xl, ... , x
n
}. Subsets of S now correspond to faces ofthe
54 5 The lattice of polyconvex sets
simplex and Theorem 3.3.1 is now a specialization of Theorem 5.3.3
to families of faces of the simplex
5.4 Lutwak's containment theorem
We now turn to a beautiful application of Helly's theorem to the question
of containment of convex bodies. Given compact convex sets K and L
with nonempty interiors, is there a simple condition that guarantees
that some translate of K is a subset of L? It turns out that the answer
to this question is determined by the relationship of K to the simplices
in R n that contain L.
For K E Kn and vERn, denote by K + v the set
K + v = {x + v : x E K}.
In other words, K + v denotes the translation of the set K by the vector
v.
Theorem 5.4.1 (Lutwak's containment theorem) Let K, L E Kn
with nonempty interiors. The following are equivalent.
(i) For every simplex such that L there exists vERn such
that K +v
(ii) There exists Va E R
n
such that K + Va L.
In other words, if every simplex containing L also contains a translate
of K, then L itself contains a translate of K.
Proof The implication (ii) '* (i) is obvious. We show that (i) '* (ii).
To begin, suppose first that L is a polytope, with facets L
1
, L
2
, .. ,Lrn
and corresponding facet (outward) unit normal vectors U1, U2,.'" Urn'
Assume also that every selection of n distinct unit normals Uj is a linearly
independent set. (Were this not the case, a small perturbation of L
would make it so.)
For each facet L
i
, let Hi denote the (n  I)dimensional hyperplane
in Rn containing L
i
, and let Ht denote the closed halfspace bounded
by Hi and containing the polytope L. Finally, denote by Ti the set of
vectors vERn such that K + v c Ht. Since each Ht is a (convex)
closed halfspace and K is compact, it is clear that each Ti is a non
empty closed convex set.
The independence condition on the unit normals {Ui} implies that,
for each distinct selection Uil' Ui2' ... ,Uin+l of n + 1 unit normals, either
5.5 Cauchy's surface area formula 55
the corresponding intersection
n+1
H . . nH+
 is
(5.7)
8=1
contains a simplex .6.
il
,i2, ... ,i
n
+l such that L .6.i l,i2, ... ,i
n
+1l or this in
tersection contains a translate of the ball O'.B of radius 0'., for all 0'. > O.
(This is the case in which the intersection (5.7) is unbounded.) In the
first case, the hypothesis of the theorem implies the existence of a vector
vERn such that K + v .6.
il
,i2, ... ,i
n
+l' In the second case there also
exists v such that K + v lies in the intersection (5.7). In either case,
there exists v E Til n .. n T
in
+
l
. In other words, each collection of n + 1
sets Ti has a nonempty intersection. ReIly's Theorem 5.3.3 then implies
the existence of a vector v such that
m
In other words, K + v Ht for i = 1, ... ,m. Since L = Hi n .. n H:!,
it follows that K + v L.
Now suppose that L is an arbitrary compact convex set. Let
be a decreasing collection of polytopes such that Pi L as i 00, and
such that each n of the facet normals to Pi are linearly independent. If
.6. is a simplex containing Pi, then L Pi .6., so there exists a vector
w such that K + w Since the theorem holds for the polytopes
Pi, it then follows that there exists a vector Vi for each i, such that
K + Vi Pi' Since the Pi are decreasing (with respect to the relation
of subset containment), the sequence {Vi} is bounded and must contain
a convergent subsequence. Assume then without loss of generality that
Vi v. Since Pi L, it follows that K + v L. 0
5.5 Cauchy's surface area formula
We conclude this chapter with the following interpretation of the surface
area S(K) of a convex body in Rn, which will be of use to us in the
sequel. If K E Kn and V is an (n  I)dimensional subspace of R
n
,
denote by KIV the orthogonal projection of K onto V. Let W
n
1 denote
the (n  I)dimensional volume of the unit ball B
n

1
in Rn1.
Lemma 5.5.1 For v E snl,
f lu, vi du = 2W
n
1.
lSnl
56 5 The lattice of polyconvex sets
Proof Recall from elementary calculus that
where snl is partitioned into many small regions Ai, having area S(Ai),
and where Ui E Ai for each i. Let Ai denote the orthogonal projection
of Ai onto the tangent hyperplane to snl at the point Ui. Denote by
AilvJ.. the orthogonal projection of Ai onto the hyperplane vJ..; that is,
into the disk B
n

l
in vJ... Because Ai is a flat region lying inside a
hyperplane with unit normal Ui, we have S(AilvJ..) = Iu . vIS(Ai)'
Meanwhile, for Ai sufficiently small, we have S(Ai) S(Ai) and
S(AilvJ..) S(AilvJ..). Therefore,
knl Iu vi du L S(AilvJ..) .
Since the collection of sets {Ai IvJ.. } covers the disk Bi twice, projecting
from both of the directions v and v (that is, from both hemispheres of
snl), we have
{ lu, vi du 2W
n
l,
}Snl
where the similarities converge to equalities in the limit, as the mesh of
the partition {Ai} goes to zero. 0
Theorem 5.5.2 (Cauchy's surface area formula) For all K E Kn,
I 1 J..
S(K) =  !InI(Klu ) duo
Wnl Snl
(5.8)
Here snl denotes the (nI)dimensional sphere; i.e. the set of all unit
vectors in Rn. Note that !In_I(KluJ..) is just the (n  I)dimensional
volume of the projection of K onto the subspace uJ...
Proof Let P be a compact convex polytope with facet unit normal vec
tors VI, ... ,V
m
and corresponding facet surface areas al, ... , am. If a
facet Pi of P has unit normal vector Vi and surface area (that is, (n  I)
volume) ai, then the projection PiluJ.. has (n  I)volume
!In_I(PiluJ..) = ail u , vii
For u E snl, the (nI)volume !In_I(PluJ..) is computed by summing
the (nI)volumes of the projections of the facets of P. This sum gives
5.5 Cauchy's surface area formula 57
twice the desired value, since each point of PluJ.. is hit twice (from above
and below) as we sum over projections of all facets of P. Hence, we have
r /InI (PluJ..) du =
JSnl
where the third equality follows from Lemma 5.5.1. Since (5.8) then
holds for any convex polytope P, the equation holds for any convex
body K by continuity. 0
Recall that, for parallelotopes P E Par(n),
/InI(P) =
We are therefore motivated to define
/InI(K) =
for all K E }Cn. The equation (5.8) now becomes
/InI(K) =  /InI(Klu ) duo
1 1 J..
2Wn1 Snl
(5.9)
Since every line f through the origin in R
n
meets snI at exactly two
points, we can rewrite this result as an integral over the projective space
Gr(n,l) (Le. the set of all lines f through the origin in Rn) instead of
integrating over the sphere. We then renormalize the resultant measure
on Gr(n, 1) so that the space Gr(n, 1) has total measure 1. This measure
is called the Haar probability measure on Gr(n,l). Integrating with
respect to the Haar probability measure on Gr(n, 1) we obtain
/InI(K) = a r /In_I(KlfJ..) df,
JGr(n,l)
where a is a constant independent of K. To compute a, set K = B
n
,
the unit ball in R
n
, to obtain
nw2n = /InI(Bn) = a r /In_I(BnlfJ..) df = aWnI,
JGr(n,l)
58 5 The lattice of polyconvex sets
since the total measure of the space Gr( n, 1) is 1. It follows that
nwn
a=.
2Wn l
Denote by Tn the rotation invariant measure on Gr(n, 1) normalized so
that
Tn(Gr(n, 1)) = 2
nWn
.
Wnl
(5.10)
The equation (5.9) now becomes
!Inl(K) = r !In_l(KlfJ..) dTn.
JGr(n,l)
(5.11)
5.6 Notes
For a general reference to the theory of convex bodies, see the book by
Schneider [85] and the survey on valuations by McMullen and Schnei
der [72]. The normalization for intrinsic volumes is due to McMullen
[70]. Groemer's extension Theorem 5.1.1 originally appeared in [32],
which contains a comprehensive presentation of extension theorems for
valuations on various classes of compact convex sets.
For a treatment of the combinatorial theory of the Euler character
istic, see [79, 80]. See also [75] for the connection between the Euler
characteristic and algebraic topology. Hadwiger presented numerous ge
ometric applications of the Euler characteristic in [37, 39]. For a modern
treatment of the Euler characteristic as a valuation on convex sets, see
[71, 72, 85].
Helly's Theorem 5.3.3 first appeared in [43]; the proof given in this
section is due to Hadwiger [37]. Theorem 5.3.2 is due to Caratheodory
[85]. The proof of Caratheodory's theorem presented above may also
be found in [37], where it appeared as a special case of a more general
theorem of Steinitz [93]. Klee's Theorem 5.3.1 was noted by Klee in [56],
and has many generalizations (see [6, 28, 37, 62]; also [18, pp. 123128]).
A nonnumerical form (in terms of cone functions) was given by Chen
[11]. A general survey on Helly's theorem, its proofs, variations and
applications, may be found in [18] and in [21].
It is conceivable that the generalization of the EulerSchHifliPoincare
formula (5.2.4) to intrinsic volumes should lead to interesting quanti
tative generalizations of Klee's Theorem 5.3.1 and thereby of Helly's
Theorem 5.3.3. Lutwak's containment Theorem 5.4.1 appeared in [68].
5.6 Notes 59
Cauchy published his surface area formula (Theorem 5.5.2) for
dimensions 2 and 3 in [9] and [10]. Generalizations of Cauchy's for
mula are treated in Sections 7.4 and 9.4 (see also [82, p. 218] and [85,
p. 295]).
6
Invariant measures on Grassmannians
Before we extend the notions introduced in Chapter 4 to the lattice of
polyconvex sets we shall require a deeper understanding of the lattice of
subspaces of Rn. In Section 6.1 we introduce the the flag coefficients,
which rely on a crucial choice of normalization for the rotation invariant
measures on real Grassmannians. This construction leads in turn to
continuous analogues of the extremal combinatorial results of Chapter 3,
here in the context of subspaces. The flag coefficients will reappear
in Chapters 810 as we investigate connections between the integral
geometry of Grassmannians and the intrinsic volumes on polyconvex
sets (see especially Section 9.4).
6.1 The lattice of subspaces
Let Mod(n) denote the set of all linear subspaces of Rn; that is, the
set of all linear varieties passing through the origin (having fixed an
origin once and for all). The set Mod(n) is a partially ordered set under
the relation of inclusion of linear subspaces. Moreover, it is a lattice,
whereby the join xVy and the meet x Ay oftwo elements x, y E Mod(n)
are defined respectively as the linear subspaces spanned by x and y and
as the intersection of x and y. The lattice Mod(n) may be viewed as
a continuous analogue of the lattice P(S) of subsets of a set S with n
elements. Note, however, that this analogy is only a partial one, since
the distributive law governing unions and intersections of subsets of S
does not hold in the lattice Mod(n). Nonetheless, this analogy shall
carry us as far as we need to go.
In the lattice Mod( n) one defines the notions of chain, flag, and rank as
for the lattice of subsets of R n. In particular, an element x of Mod( n) has
rank k (that is, r(x) = k), whenever x is a linear subspace of dimension
6.1 The lattice of subspaces 61
k. The subspace {O} is the minimal element ofthe lattice Mod(n). Much
as the group of permutations of the set S acts naturally on P( S), the
orthogonal group O(n) (that is, the group of rotations about the origin
and reflections across hyperplanes through the origin) acts naturally on
the lattice Mod(n).
The set of all elements of Mod(n) of dimension (rank) k, denoted
Gr(n, k), is called the Grassmannian. Our objective is to describe the
invariant (Haar) measure that acts on Gr(n, k). It is known that this
measure is unique up to a common factor (but we will not prove this).
If our analogy is not misleading, the total measure of Gr( n, k) should be
an analogue of the binomial coefficient.
To begin, consider the invariant measure Tn on Gr(n,l); that is, on
the set of all straight lines through the origin. Denote
[nJ = Tn(Gr(n,l)) = 2
nWn
,
Wnl
(6.1)
where Wn denotes the volume of the unit ball En in Rn. The real
numbers [nJ will playa role analogous to that of the positive integers n
in the discrete case.
The measure Tn may be viewed constructively in the following way.
Let the invariant measure on the unit sphere snl (that is, on the surface
of the unit ball) be denoted by anI. For any measurable subset A of
Gr(n,l), let A' be the subset of the unit sphere snl defined by
A' = U xnsnl.
xEA
It then follows from (5.10) that
Tn(A) = anl (A') .
2Wn 1
To check this, note that the surface area of the unit sphere is
an_I(Snl) = nWn
so that
T
n
(Gr(n,l)) = nWn .
2Wn 1
Again it is clear that the measure Tn is invariant under rotations.
Let Flag(n) be the set of flags in Mod(n). For x E Mod(n), denote
by Flag(x) the set of all flags that contain x; that is, the set of all
sequences (XO, Xl, ... , Xn) of Xi E Mod(n), where dim(xi) = i, such that
62 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
Xo Xl '" X
n
, and such that one of the Xi equals x. Note that
Xo = {O} and Xn = Rn.
For fixed Xk, the set of all sequences (Xk, Xk+l, ... , Xn) with Xi E
Mod(n), such that dim(xi) = i and Xi Xi+l, is isomorphic to Flag(n
k). Similarly, the set of sequences (xo, Xl>' .. , Xk) is isomorphic to
Flag(k).
Denote by <Pn the invariant measure on the set Flag(n), to be com
puted as follows. The measure Tn on Gr(n,1) induces a measure Tn
on the set Gr(n, n  1) via orthogonal duality. If f(xo, Xl> ... , xn) is a
simple function on the set Flag( n), then let
J f d<pn = J J f(xo, Xl> ... , xn) d<pnl (xo, . .. , Xnl) dTn,
so that the measure <Pn is defined inductively. It is clearly invariant.
A more explicit form for <Pn can be obtained by the following argu
ment. If (xo, Xl> ... , Xn) is a flag in Mod(n), let
The sequence (YI, Y2, ... , Yn) is a sequence of orthogonal straight lines,
a frame. Conversely, given a frame (Yl> Y2, .. , Yn), we obtain a flag by
setting
Xo = {O}, Xl = YI, X2 = YI VY2, X3 = YI V Y2 V Y3, ...
This defines a onetoone correspondence between flags and frames. If
f(xo, Xl> ... , Xn) is a realvalued (measurable) function on flags, let
/(Yl> Y2, ... , Yn) be the corresponding function on frames. Then
This result can be read in the simpler language of combinatorics. Once
the line YI has been chosen, which can be done in Tn ways, the subspace
X2 is determined by the choice of a straight line Y2 in the space orthogonal
to Xl (through the origin), which can be done in Tnl ways, etc.
The measure of Flag( n) turns out to be
<pn(Flag(n)) = [n][n  1] ... [2][1],
also denoted [n]!, where [1] = 1. Note that
[n]! = n!WnWnI" 'WI
2
n
WnIWn_2'" Wo
(6.2)
6.2 Computing the flag coefficients 63
We now define an invariant measure on Gr(n, k). For A Gr(n, k),
let Flag(A) be the set of all flags (xo, XI, ... ,x
n
) such that Xk EA. Set
(6.3)
To justify this normalization combinatorially, note that, for each Xk E A,
there are exactly [kJ![n  kJ! flags containing Xk; that is, to choose a
flag containing Xk one must choose a frame for the vector space Xk, of
which there are [kJ! choices, and a frame for the (n  k)dimensional
complementary space xt, of which there are [n  kJ! choices.
The measure Ilk is evidently invariant under rotations, and we have
Ilk (Gr(n, k)) = kJ! =
These values, called flag coefficients, are continuous analogues of the
binomial coefficients of the discrete lattice in Chapter 3. From (6.2) we
obtain
[
n] n! Wn (n) Wn
k  k!(n  k)! WkWnk  k WkWnk (6.4)
6.2 Computing the flag coefficients
It is not difficult to compute the numerical values of the numbers [nJ
and their associated flag coefficients. We begin by deriving the following
well known formula for the volume Wn of the unit ball in Rn.
Proposition 6.2.1 For n 1
Wn = r((n/2) + 1)
Here r(t) denotes the Euler gamma function, given by
Proof We first compute the integral
64 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
We can think of the square of this integral as the product of integrals in
two independent variables, x and y.
(1: e
x2
dX) 2 = 1: e
x2
dx 1: e
y2
dy = 1: e(x
2
+y2) dxdy
On switching to polar coordinates in the xyplane, we obtain
so that
1: e(x
2
+
y2
) dxdy
121r 1
00
e _r2 r dr dO
2n 1
00
e
r2
r dr
n,
Following a similar argument in nvariables,
(6.5)
since the surface area of the sphere snl is equal to nw
n
. On substituting
y = r2, we obtain
6.2 Computing the flag coefficients 65
Hence, we have
1fn/2
Wn = + 1)"
o
Proposition 6.2.1 can be given a more computationally pliable form,
provided that we examine separately the cases in which the dimension
n of the unit ball is even or odd.
Proposition 6.2.2 Let k be a nonnegative integer. Then
22k+11f
k
k!
and
W2k+l = (2k + I)!
Proof It immediately follows from Proposition 6.2.1 that
1fk 1fk
W2k = f (k + 1) = If
To compute W2k+l first note that
f(I/2) = 1
00
exx
i
dx.
On substituting x = y2 and dx = 2y dy we obtain
f(I/2) = e
y2
2y dy = e
y2
dy = y1f,
1
00 1 1
00
o Y 00
where the last equality follows from (6.5). It now follows from Proposi
tion 6.2.1 that
2k+"
1f2
2k+l 2kl ... .! IJr
2 2 2
Y
"
2
k
+
1
1fk
(2k + 1)(2k  1) (3)(1)
66 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
2
k
+
1
1f
k
2
k
k!
(2k + 1)!
22k+11f
k
k!
(2k + 1)!
o
Proposition 6.2.2 leads to easy computations of [n]. Once again there
are two formulas, depending on the parity of n.
Proposition 6.2.3 Let k be a positive integer. Then
21f(2k  1)! 21fk (2k  1)
[2k] = 4k(k _ 1)!(k  1)! = 4k k '
and
4
k
(k!? k (2k)1
[2k+1]= (2k)! =4 k
Proof Computing directly from the definition (6.1) and Proposition 6.2.2
we get
[2k]
Similarly,
[2k+ 1]
2kw2k
2W2k1
k1fk (2k  1)!
2
2k

1
1fk1(k  1)!
21fk (2k  1)
4k k .
(2k + 1)W2k+1
2W2k
(2k + 1)2
2k
+
1
1f
k
k! k!
(2k + 1)! 21fk
4
k
k!k!
(2k)! .
The first few values of W
n
, [n], and [n]! run as follows:
o
6.2 Computing the flag coefficients 67
!l
n!wn
n
71"2
2W
n
_l 2
n
n Wn [n] [n]!
0 1 1 1
1 2 1 1
2 7r
71" 71"
"2 "2
3
471"
2 7r
""3
4
71"2
371"
371"2
""2 4" 4""
(6.6)
5
871"2
8
27r
2
15 "3
6
71"3
1571"
1571"3
""6 16
8
7
1671"3
16
67r
3
105 "5
8
71"4
3571"
10571"4
24 32 16
9
3271"4
128
247r4
945 35
10
71"5
31571"
94571"5
120 256 32
Proposition 6.2.3 leads to a number of interesting relations among the
numbers [n]. For example, one can easily show that, for k > 0,
and
[2k][2k + 1] = k7r,
[2k _ 1][2k] = (2k  1)7r,
2
from which it follows that
[n+ 2] n+ 1
n
for all n > O.
Using either of Propositions 6.2.2 and 6.2.3 one may easily compute
the values of the flag coefficients. Once again the formulas vary according
to the parity of the parameters.
Proposition 6.2.4 Let m and k be positive integers. Then
[
2m] = (2m) (m) 1 d
2k 2k k an
[
2m] 7r (2m)! 2m7r ( 2m  1 )
2k+1 = 4
m
k!m!(mk1)! = 4
m
k,m,mk1 '
68
while
6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
[2rr;:1] =4
k
(7)C:)1 and
11] = 4
m

k
(m r: k) kk)) 1
Proof Combining (6.4) with the formulas of Proposition 6.2.2, we obtain
= = = (7)1
With a little more effort, we have
1)
(
2m ) 1fm (2k + I)! (2m  2k  I)!
2k + 1 m! 22k+11f
k
k! 22m2k11fmk1(m  k  I)!
(
2m ) _1f_ (2k + 1)!(2m  2k  I)!
2k + 1 m!22m k!(m  k  I)!
1f (2m)!
4
m
k!m!(m  k  I)!'
Computing once again,
(
2m + 1) W2m+ 1
2k W2kW2m2kH
(
2m + 1) 2
2m
+
1
1f
m
m! k! (2m  2k + I)!
2k (2m + I)! 1fk 2
2m

2
k+11fmk(m  k)!
4
k
m!k! k!
(2k)!(m  k)! k!
4k(7) Ckk)1
The final formula now follows easily from the dual symmetry of the flag
coefficients:
[
2m + 1] = [2m+l] =4m k ( m ) (2(mk))1,
2k+l 2(mk) mk mk
by the previous computation. o
6.2 Computing the flag coefficients 69
By means of Proposition 6.2.4 one may easily generate the following
Pascal triangle for the flag coefficients as n = 1, ... ,8.
1 1
1
71"
1
"2
1 2 2 1
1
371"
3
371"
1
""4 ""4
1
8
4 4
8
1
"3 "3
1
1571"
5
1571"
5
1571"
1
16 !l 16
1
16
6 8 8 6
16
1
5" 5"
1
3571"
7
10571" 35 10571"
7
3571"
1
32 32 3 32 32
(6.7)
Certain patterns are immediately noticeable. For example, the ta
ble (6.7) suggests that
[;]=n1
for all n ::::: 2. This indeed follows easily from Proposition 6.2.4. It is
also not difficult to verify that
]
for all odd positive integers n.
nl
= 22,
If n is even, the value of the middle flag coefficient is given by one of
two formulas, depending on the congruence class of n modulo 4. Com
putations similar to those preceding show that if n == 0 mod 4 then
If n == 2 mod 4 then
[
n] (n) ( ) (n + 2)71' ( n ) (n + 2)71'
= n
4
2 2n+2 = n!2 2n+2'
Recall that, for fixed n, the classical binomial coefficient is max
imized at k = n/2 if n is even, or k = (n  1)/2 if n is odd. In the
next section we will show that flag coefficients are also maximized 'in
the middle,' as the table (6.7) suggests.
70 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
6.3 Properties of the flag coefficients
The flag coefficients satisfy a number of properties analogous to those
of the binomial coefficients. For example,
In analogy to Pascal's triangle relations we have the following.
Proposition 6.3.1 For 1 k n 1,
WklWnk [n  1] + WkWnkl [n  1] = WkWnk [n] (6.8)
Wnl k  1 Wnl k Wn k
Proof We prove (6.8) by direct computation:
WklWnk [n  1] + WkWnkl [n  1]
Wnl k  1 Wnl k
D
In the discrete case, Pascal's triangle for binomial coefficients is much
cleaner:
(
n 1) (n 1) = (n)
k1 + k k .
A similar expression exists for the flag coefficients, with a relation of
inequality. The inequality will follow from a more elementary additive
inequality for the numbers [nJ.
Recall from elementary calculus that the volume of the unit nball
may be computed by integrating over its (n  1 )dimensional slices; that
is,
(I 2 nl
Wn = 2 J
o
wn l(1 X ) 2 dx.
The substitutions x = sin () and dx = cos () d() yield
6.3 Properties of the flag coefficients 71
In other words,
[n] = nWn = n {:!f;; cos
n
0 dO.
2Wn l J
o
(6.9)
This equation leads in turn to the following proposition.
Proposition 6.3.2 For all positive integers m and n,
[n] + [m] > [n+m].
Proof If 0::; e::; 1r/2, then 0::; cose ::; 1. From (6.9) we then obtain
[n]+[m]
n l:!f;; cos
n
e dO + m l:!f;; cos
m
0 dO
> n l:!f;; cos
n
+
m
e dO + m l:!f;; cos
n
+
m
e de
(n + m) l:!f;; cos
n
+
m
0 de = [n + m].
D
Proposition 6.3.2 and Theorem 6.3.3 illustrate a fundamental differ
ence between the combinatorics of finite sets and the measure structure
of this vector space analogue.
Theorem 6.3.3 (The Pascal inequality for flag coefficients) For
1 ::; k ::; n  1,
[
n  1] [n  1] [n]
kl + k > k .
Proof For 1 ::; k ::; n  1, we have
[n  I]! [n  I]!
[k  1]![n  k]! + [k]![n  k I]!
[n  1]!([k] + [n  k])
[k]![nk]!
By Proposition 6.3.2, [k] + [n  k] > [k + (n  k)] = [n], so that
[
n  1] [n  1] [n  1]![n] [n]!
k 1 + k > [k]![n  k]! = [k]![n  k]!
D
72 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
Recall that the real numbers [nJ playa role analogous to that of the
positive integers n in the discrete case. The following proposition demon
strates in part the expedience of our choice of normalization for the
measure Tn; that is, for the value of [nJ.
Proposition 6.3.4 The map n 1+ [nJ is an increasing function.
Proof From Proposition 6.2.1 we have
[nJ= nWn = =
2Wn1 2 r (nt ) 2 r
Define a function f on the positive real numbers by
r (t +
f(t) = vn r(t) .
Since fG) = [nJ, it is sufficient to show that f is an increasing function
of t. Recall that [4, p. 15J
r(t) = lim ktk!
k>oo t(t + 1) (t + k)
This implies that
f(t)
(
kt+(1/2) k' )
vnlim 1 1 . 1 X
k>oo (t + "2)(t +"2 + 1) (t + "2 + k)
r .
(
ktk' )1
t(t + 1) (t + k)
r= l' t(t + 1) (t + k)y'k
y7r 1m 1 1 1
k+oo (t + "2) (t + "2 + 1) ... (t + "2 + k)
Since the function
t 1
=1
2t+l
(6.10)
is increasing with respect to t > 0, so is the product on the righthand
side of (6.10). It follows that f is increasing for t > 0, and we conclude
that [nJ is an increasing function of the positive integers. D
From Proposition 6.3.4 we deduce the following useful property for
the generalized factorial [nJ!:
Proposition 6.3.5 For 1 :::; k :::; I:::; n/2,
[kJ![n  kJ! 2:: [IJ![n  IJ!
6.4 A continuous analogue of Sperner's theorem 73
Proof To begin, note that
n
o < k < l <  < n  l < n  k < n.
  2  
It follows from Proposition 6.3.4 that
[n  k]. [n l + 1] 2: [l] [k + 1].
(Note that there are l  k factors on each side of this inequality.) Mul
tiplying on both sides, we obtain
[n  k]![k]! 2: [n  l]![l]!
D
The flag coefficients satisfy the following property, in evident analogy
to the classical binomial coefficients.
Proposition 6.3.6 For 1 :s; k :s; n,
Once again (n/2) denotes the greatest integer less than or equal to n/2.
Proof Since
= k]! = [n: k]'
it is sufficient to consider the case in which k < (n/2). On applying
Proposition 6.3.5 to the case l = (n/2), we find that
[n  k]![k]! 2: [(n/2)]![n  (n/2)]!,
so that
[n]! [n]!
[n  k]![k]! :s; [(n/2)]![n  (n/2)]!'
D
6.4 A continuous analogue of Sperner's theorem
Define a measure Vn on Mod(n) by taking the direct sum of the measures
vI:. That is, for any measurable subset A Mod(n), define
n
vn(A) = L v'k(A n Gr(n, k)).
k=O
The measure Vn satisfies the following analogue of the classical L.Y.M.
inequality (3.1).
74 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
Theorem 6.4.1 (The continuous L.Y.M. inequality) Let A
Mod(n) be an antichain. For 0::; k ::; n let
Ak = An Gr(n, k),
so that
is a disjoint union. Then
(6.11)
Proof For each 0 ::; k ::; n, the measure of flags meeting Ak is given by
by the definition (6.3) of vI:. Since every flag in Flag(n) meets A in at
most one point, we have
n n
L v'k(Ak) [k]![n  k]! = L 4>n(Flag(Ak)) = 4>n(Flag(A)) ::::; [n]!
k=O k=O
It follows that
o
We now have the necessary tools to prove a continuous analogue of
Theorem 3.1.1.
Theorem 6.4.2 (The continuous Sperner theorem) Let A be an
antichain in Mod( n). Then
Evidently equality is attained in Theorem 6.4.2 when A = Gr(n, (n/2)).
Proof We reason in analogy to the proof of Theorem 3.1.1. For 0 ::; k ::; n
let Ak = AnGr(n, k). Combining (6.11) and Proposition 6.3.6 we obtain
t vl:(A
k
) < t v'k(A
k
) < 1
k=O [(n/2J  k=O ,
6.4 A continuous analogue of Sperner's theorem 75
so that
o
In analogy to the discrete lattice P(S), a subset F Mod(n) is called
an rfamily if chains in F contain no more than r elements. Given an
rfamily F in Mod(n) let Fk = FnGr(n, k). Since every flag in Mod(n)
meets F in at most r elements, we have
n
L<Pn(Flag(Fk)) ::; [nJ! r.
k=O
From (6.3) we then obtain the following generalization of (6.11):
VJ::(Fk)
k=O _.
(6.12)
This inequality leads in turn to a continuous analogue of Sperner's
theorem for rfamilies (Theorem 3.1.2).
Theorem 6.4.3 Let F be an rfamily in Mod(n). Then
Proof As in the proof of the discrete case (Theorem 3.1.2), relabel the
flag coefficients Co, Cl, .. ,C
n
in descending order, so that Co :2:: Cl :2::
... :2:: en; then relabel the numerators VJ::(Fk) in (6.12) by xo, Xl,, Xn
so that each Xk is the numerator of that term of (6.12) having Ck as
denominator. The inequality (6.12) now becomes
It then follows from Lemma 3.1.3 that
Xo + Xl + ... + Xn ::; Co + Cl + ... + Crl
In other words,
o
76 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
We now consider a continuous analogue of a question first posed by
Sperner (see also Theorem 3.2.7). Given A <:;:; Gr(n, k), let [A]z denote
the collection
[A]z = {W E Gr(n, l) : W <:;:; V for some V E A}.
Here we assume that 0 ::; l ::; k ::; n. Sperner's question, recast in the
language of subspaces, asks for a lower bound on the measure of [A]z,
given only the measure II
n
(A). The continuous L.Y.M. inequality gives
us such a bound.
Theorem 6.4.4 For A <:;:; Gr(n, k),
[k]![n k]!
II
n
([A]z);::: [l]![n l]! lin (A).
Proof Let Bz = Gr(n, l)  [A]z. If WE Bz then W cannot be contained
in any V E A. In other words, the set A U Bz is an antichain. It then
follows from (6.11) that
Meanwhile,
so that
lin (A) 1 _ IIn ([A]z) < 1
+ [7J _.
It follows that
[
n] [n] 1 [k]![n  k]!
II
n
([A]z);::: l k IIn (A) = [l]![n l]! lin (A).
o
For example, in the case l = k  1, we have
[k]
IIn ([A]k1) ;::: [ k ] lin (A).
n +1
Theorem 6.4.4 can also be expressed in the language of simplicial
complexes. As for the discrete lattice P(S), define A <:;:; Mod(n) to be
a simplicial complex, if whenever V E A and W <:;:; V we have W E A.
(Such a set A is also called an order ideal of Mod(n).) In other words,
6.5 A continuous analogue of Meshalkin's theorem 77
if V E A, then all subspaces of V are also elements of A. Once again
the set of maximal elements of a simplicial complex is an antichain,
and a simplicial complex having exactly one maximal element is called
a simplex (or principal order ideal). The elements of dimension k in
a simplicial complex A are called the kfaces of A. Theorem 6.4.4 can
now be thought of as giving a lower bound for the measure of the set of
Ifaces of A, given the measure of the set of kfaces of A.
6.5 A continuous analogue of Meshalkin's theorem
We now turn to the continuous (vector space) analogues of the rdecom
positions and ssystems on the discrete lattice P(S); see also Section 3.1.
A map 8: {I, ... ,r} + Mod(n) is called an rdecomposition ofRn
if
(i) 8( i) 8(j) for i =I j, and
(ii) 8(1) EEl EEl 8(r) = Rn
Denote by Dec(n,r) the set of all rdecompositions of Rn. Note that,
for each 8 E Dec(n, r),
dim 8(1) + ... + dim 8(r) = n.
Given positive integers aI, a2, ... , a
r
such that al + ... + a
r
= n, we
shall denote by M ult (n; aI, ... , a
r
) the set of all rdecompositions 8 such
that dim8(i) = ai for i = 1, ... ,r. In other words, Mult(n;al, ... ,a
r
)
is the set of all (ordered) decompositions of Rn into direct sums of
subspaces having dimensions al, ... , a
r
. Evidently the set Dec(n, r) can
be expressed as the finite disjoint union
Dec(n,r) =
An ssystem of order r is a subset a Dec(n, r) such that the set
{8(i):8Ea} (6.13)
is an antichain in Mod(n), for each 1 :::; i :::; r.
An obvious example of an ssystem of order r is Mult( n; aI, ... , a
r
)
for some admissible selection of al, ... , a
r
. If 8, ( E Mult(n; al, ... , ar )
then 8(i) and ((i) both have dimension ai, so that either 8(i) = ((i)
or the two subspaces are incomparable in the subset partial ordering
on Mod(n). This holds for i = 1, ... , r, and so the antichain condition
on (6.13) is satisfied.
78 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
Other disguised examples with which we have already worked are the
ssystems of order 2. Let A be an antichain in Mod(n). For each V E A
we can express R n as the direct sum V EEl V J.., so that the pair (V, V J.. )
is a 2decomposition in Dec(n, 2). Moreover, the set
{VJ..: V E A}
is also an antichain in Mod(n), so that the set
(T = {(V, V J..) : V E A}
is an ssystem of order 2. Thus the notion of ssystem is again a
generalization of the notion of an antichain. Similarly, the Grassman
nian Gr(n, k) can be viewed as Mu1t(n; k, n  k) through the bijection
V 1+ (V, VJ..).
In analogy to the construction of the measure v'k on Gr(n, k), define
invariant measures on the sets Mult( n; aI, ... , a
r
) as follows. For 8 E
Mu1t(n;al,.'" ar) define a flag (xo, Xl,'" ,Xn) E Flag(n) to be compat
ible with 8 if
(i) X
al
= 8(1), and
(ii) Xal+.+a)Xal+.+ai_l = 8(i), for i 2: 2.
Here the quotient x
al
+.+ai / x
al
+.+ail denotes the orthogonal comple
ment of the vector space x
al
+.+ail inside the larger space x
al
+.+ai'
Let Flag(A) be the set of all flags (XO, Xl, ... , Xn) compatible with
some 8 E A for A Mult( n; aI, ... , a
r
). Define
(6.14)
To justify this normalization combinatorially, note that, for each 8 E A,
there are exactly [al]![a2]!'" far]! flags compatible with 8; that is, to
choose a flag compatible with 8 one must choose a frame for each of the
vector spaces 8
i
, of which there are [ail! choices for each i.
The measure v;;l, ... ,a
r
is evidently invariant under rotations, and we
have
These values, called multiflag coefficients, are continuous analogues of
the multinomial coefficients of the discrete lattice in Chapter 3.
Define a measure vn;r on Dec( n, r) by taking the direct sum of the
6.5 A continuous analogue of Meshalkin's theorem 79
measures v::l, ... ,a
r
That is, for any measurable subset A Dec(n, r),
define
(6.15)
Just as the continuous Spemer Theorem 6.4.2 gives the maximum pos
sible measure for an antichain A in Mod(n), a generalization of this the
orem gives the maximum possible measure for an ssystem in Dec( n, r).
En route to such a generalization we prove a multinomial version of the
continuous L.Y.M. inequality. (Compare with Theorem 3.1.4.)
Theorem 6.5.1 (The continuous multinomial L.Y.M. inequal
ity) Let u Dec( n, r) be an ssystem. For al + ... + a
r
= n denote
so that
U=
u
(J'al, ... ,ar'
is a disjoint union. Then
(6.16)
Proof For al + .. +ar = n the measure of flags compatible with ual, ... ,a
r
is given by
A. (Flag(u )) = v
n
(u )[al]"" [a ]'
'f'n al,,ar al, ... ,a
r
al, ... ,ar r
by the definition (6.14) of v::l, ... ,a
r
'
Suppose that a flag (Xo, Xl, ... , Xn) is compatible with both ,,(,8 E
u. Then "((1) = x
al
and 8(1) = Xbll where al = dim"((l) and bl =
dim8(lt Since (Xo, Xl,"" Xn) is a flag, we have x
al
Xb
l
or vice versa.
However, u is an ssystem, so that either "((1) = 8(1) or the two spaces
are incomparable. Therefore "((1) = 8(1) and al = b
l
. Continuing,
we have "((2) = Xal+a2/Xal and 8(2) = Xbl+b2/Xal (since al = bI). A
similar argument then implies that "((2) = 8(2) and a2 = b
2
Continuing
in this manner we conclude that "((i) = 8(i) for each 1 ::; i ::; r, so that
"( = 8. In other words, every flag in Flag(n) is compatible with at most
one rdecomposition 8 E u. It follows that
80 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
:::; [n]!,
so that
D
The multifiag coefficients also satisfy the following property, in anal
ogy to the classical multinomial coefficients.
Proposition 6.5.2 Let r :::; n be positive integers, and suppose that
n = rq + b, where q :::: 0 is an integer and 0 :::; b :::; r  I is the integer
remainder. For al + ... + a
r
= n,
Proof Let al, ... ,a
r
be positive integers such that al + ... + a
r
= n.
Without loss of generality, suppose that al < (nlr). Then ai > (nlr)
for some i > 1. Again without loss of generality, suppose that
Then a2  al :::: 2, so that
It then follows from Proposition 6.3.5 that
Replace al with al + I and a2 with a2  1. Note that the identity
al + ... + a
r
= n is preserved. This process is repeated until ai :::: (nlr)
for alII:::; i :::; r; that is, until ai = (nlr) + I for I :::; i :::; band ai = (nlr)
for b + I :::; i :::; r, where b is the integer remainder upon division of n by
r.
Since each iteration of this procedure decreases the value of the prod
uct [al]! [ar]!, it follows that
[al]! [ar]! :::: ([(nlr)]!r
b
([(nlr) + I]!)b,
6.6 Helly's theorem for subspaces 81
for all al + ... + a
r
= n. Therefore,
[n]! [n]!
[aI]![ar ]!::; ([(nlr)]!r
b
([(nlr)+l]!)b'
for all al + ... + a
r
= n. D
We are now able to prove a continuous analogue to Meshalkin's The
orem 3.1.5, a multinomial generalization of the continuous Sperner The
orem 6.4.2.
Theorem 6.5.3 (The continuous Meshalkin theorem) Let 17 be an
ssystem in Dec(n,r). Then
Vn r(I7) < [ n ],
,  (nlr),, (nlr) , (nlr) + 1"", (nlr) + 1
, ", , "
'V' V
rb b
where n == b mod r.
Proof We reason in analogy to the proof of Meshalkin's Theorem 3.1.5.
For al + ... +a
r
= n let l7
a1
, ... ,a
r
= 17 nMult(n; aI, ... ,a
r
). By combin
ing (6.16) and Proposition 6.5.2 we obtain
v
n
(17 )
L al,,ar al,,ar
al ++ar=n [(n/r), .. ,(n/r),(n/r)+l, .. ,(n/r)+l]
so that
v
n
(17 )
al, ... ,ar al,,ar
al+ .. +ar=n
<
[(nlr), ... , (nlr) , (nlr) + 1"", (nlr) + 1]'
D
6.6 Helly's theorem for subspaces
Using the language of simplicial complexes in Mod(n) introduced in Sec
tion 6.4, it may be possible to apply the Euler characteristic techniques
of Section 5.3 to prove the following Hellytype theorem for subspaces
of R n. However, this theorem also follows easily from elementary linear
algebra.
82 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
Theorem 6.6.1 (Helly's theorem for Mod(n)) Let F be a family of
nonzero subspaces ofRn. Suppose that, for any subset G F such that
IGI :S n (that is, every subset of cardinality at most n of F),
dim (n x) > O.
xEG
Then
dim (n x) > O.
xEF
In other words, if every n elements of F contain a common line through
the origin, then there is at least one line , contained in all o( the sub
spaces in F.
Proof To begin, suppose that F is a finite family of subspaces. For this
case, the proof is by induction on the size IFI of the family F. If IFI :S n
then the theorem holds trivially. Suppose that the theorem holds for the
case I F I = m for some m 2: n. We then consider the case of I F I = m + l.
Write F = {XI,X2,'" ,Xm+I}, and denote
(6.17)
Since the theorem is true for families of size m, each Yi has positive
dimension. That is, for each i E {1, ... , m + 1} there exists a nonzero
vector Vi E Yi. Since m 2: n, the collection {VI, V2, ... , Vm + d must be
linearly dependent. Without loss of generality, we may then assume that
Vm+1 = CIVI + ... + CmVm '
where not all the coefficients Ci are zero. However, (6.17) implies that
Vi E Xm+1 for all i E {1, ... ,m}. It follows that Vm+1 E Xm+1 as well.
Since Vm+1 E Ym+l, we have
m+1
Vm+1 E n Xj'
j=1
This completes the induction step and the proof of the finite case.
To prove the general case, consider the set x of all lines through the
origin contained in a given (nonzero) subspace x; that is
x = {, E Gr(n, 1) : , x}.
6.7 Notes 83
For all nonzero x E Mod(n), the set x is a closed subset of the compact
space Gr(n, 1). Define
F = {x: x E F},
and define G similarly for subfamilies G of F.
Suppose G is any finite subfamily of subspaces in F. Since F satisfies
the intersection condition of Theorem 6.6.1, so does the subfamily G.
Since G is finite, it follows from the previous argument that
dim (n x) > o.
xEG
In other words, the family G oi sets has a nonempty intersec
tion, for every finite subfamily G of F. It follows from the compactness
of Gr(n, 1) that the family F of closed sets has a nonempty intersec
tion. Equivalently, the intersection of all subspaces in F has positive
dimension. D
6.7 Notes
In this chapter we have assumed the existence and uniqueness of Haar
(orthogonal invariant) measures on the spaces Gr(n, i) and Flag(n),
which are homogeneous spaces of the orthogonal group O(n). For a
complete discussion of Haar measures on Lie groups and their homoge
neous spaces, see [76]. See also [97, p. 151].
The measures Tn, n, V
n
, and vn;r may also be defined from the per
spective of the action of 0 (n) on the domains of these measures. Choos
ing a normalization for Tn determines a normalization for the O(n)
invariant measure on the group O(n) itself. The actions of O(n) on the
spaces Flag(n), Mod(n), and Dec(n, r) then induce precisely the invari
ant measures n, V
n
, and vn;r on these spaces. We give a brief sketch of
this approach, leaving the details to the reader (see also [76]).
To begin, recall that the columns of an orthogonal n x n matrix A de
termine a unique orthogonal frame for Rn. Conversely, given an orthog
onal frame in Rn, we can construct an orthogonal matrix by choosing
a unit vector from each line in the frame. Since each line in an orthog
onal frame contains two unit vectors, there is a 2nto1 correspondence
between the group 0 (n) and the set offrames for R n, and consequently
between O(n) and Flag(n). Once again setting [n] = Tn (Gr(n, 1)), we
can construct an O(n)invariant measure n on the group O(n) itself,
84 6 Invariant measures on Grassmannians
such that
n(O(n)) = 2[n]nl(O(n  1)),
so that
Recall that the group O(n) acts transitively on Gr(n, k), for 0 .::; k .::;
n. Moreover, the stabilizer Stab(V) of a subspace V E Gr(n, k) under
this action is isomorphic to the product group O(k) x O(n  k). This
follows from an argument similar to the 'combinatorial' argument on
frames given in Section 6.1. It follows from elementary Lie group theory
that there exists a diffeomorphism between the space Gr( n, k) and the
quotient space (no longer a group)
O(n)
O(k) x O(n  k)"
This diffeomorphism induces an invariant measure vi: on Gr(n, k), such
that
[n]!
[k]![n k]!'
as in our original approach. A similar construction works for the mea
sures vn;al, ... ,ar on the spaces Mult(n;al, ... ,ar ), and again this con
struction via group actions agrees with that of Section 6.5.
Theorems 6.4.2, 6.4.3 and 6.5.3, which give continuous analogues of
Sperner's and Meshalkin's theorems, are due to Klain and Rota [55].
Many results in the lattice theory of Mod(n) hold independently of the
normalization of the measure Tn; that is, the value of [n]. For example, in
[24], Fisk developed a similar construction, in which the total measure of
Gr(n, 1) is taken to be nw
n
/2, the measure suggested by the usual two
toone quotient map from the unit sphere in Rn. However, this normal
ization does not permit an extension of the lattice analogy sufficient to
admit analogues of Sperner's and Meshalkin's theorems, since the value
of nw
n
/2 is not an increasing function of n. Moreover, our choice (6.1) of
normalization [n] in Section 6.1 is compatible with Cauchy's surface area
formula in the sense described by the equation (5.11). In subsequent sec
tions we shall see that (6.1) is in fact the unique choice of normalization
that agrees with a fundamental normalization for the rigid motion in
variant measures on R
n
and its subspaces, namely, the intrinsic volumes
(see also [55]).
6.7 Notes 85
The bound given in Theorem 6.4.4 is probably not the best. In the dis
crete case, Katona [48] and Kruskal [57] independently obtained a much
stronger result (see Section 3.4), which unlike Theorem 6.4.4 did not
depend on the size of the ambient set (or, in the language of subspaces,
the dimension n of the ambient vector space). Perhaps a continuous
analogue to the KatonaKruskal theorem is waiting in the wings.
7
The intrinsic volumes for polyconvex sets
In this chapter we shift our attention from the Grassmannian (kplanes
passing through the origin in Rn) to the affine Grassmannian (all k
planes in R
n
), in order to extend the intrinsic volumes of Section 4.2
from the lattice of parallelotopes to the larger lattice of polyconvex sets.
A crucial tool in this generalization will be the Euler characteristic of
Section 5.2, which will serve as a device for testing whether a compact
convex set intersects a given kplane. Section 7.4 concludes the chap
ter with a preliminary version of the mean projection formula, which
provides a fundamental connection between the intrinsic volumes and
the lattice of subspaces. An improved version of the mean projection
formula will appear in Section 9.4.
7.1 The affine Grassmannian
We next consider the partially ordered set Aff(n) of all linear varieties in
Rn, whether through the origin or not. The partially ordered set Aff(n)
is not a wellbehaved lattice. The group En of Euclidean motions acts
naturally on Aff(n). Denote by Graff(n, k) the subset of Aff(n) consisting
of all elements of rank k; that is, all linear varieties of dimension k. The
minimal element of the partially ordered set Aff(n) is the empty set 0
(unlike in Mod(n), where the minimal element was the zero subspace
{o}).
We shall prove the existence of a measure oAk on Graff( n, k) that is
invariant under the Euclidean group En. To this end, we parametrize
Graff(n, k) as follows. Given V E Graff(n, k), let VJ.. be the maximal
linear subspace of R n orthogonal to V and containing the origin. There
is a unique maximal linear subspace or(V) orthogonal to V J.. and con
taining the origin. The subspace or(V) is of dimension k; we shall say
7.2 The intrinsic volumes and Hadwiger's formula 87
that V and or(V) are parallel. The set V n V J.. is a point in V which we
denote by p(V).
Thus, to every V E Graff( n, k) there corresponds a pair (or(V), p),
where or(V) E Gr(n, k) and p E or(V)J.. Rn. (Note that or(V)J.. =
VJ...) Conversely, given any pair (Vo,p), where Vo E Gr(n,k), and p E
VoJ.., there is a unique linear variety V E Graff( n, k) such that or(V) =
Vo and V n VoJ.. = p.
For V E Graff( n, k) and pER n, denote by V + p the translation of
the linear variety V by the vector p. If f is a realvalued measurable
function on Graff(n, k), let 1: Gr(n, k) x Rn R be given by the
equation
/(Vo,p) = f(Vo + p),
and define
J f dAI: = 1 1 f(Vo,p) dp dvk'(vo)'
Gr(n,k) voL
where dp denotes the ordinary Lebesgue measure on vl Rnk.
We thereby define a measure AI: on Graff( n, k) that is invariant un
der the group En. To see this, suppose that gv E En corresponds to
translation by the vector v. Then the composition of functions
f 0 gv(Vo,p) = f 0 gv(Vo + p) = f(Vo + P + v) = f(Vo + P + vIVL),
o
where vlvL denotes the orthogonal projection of the vector v onto the
o
subspace vl. We then have
1 1 f(Vo + P + vlvL) dp dvk'(vo)
Gr(n,k) VoL 0
r r f(Vo + p) dp dvk'(Vo)
JGr(n,k) JVoL
J fdAI:,
by the translation invariance of the measure dp. A similar argument
shows that AI: is invariant under rotations (and reflections), and conse
quently is rigid motion invariant.
7.2 The intrinsic volumes and Hadwiger's formula
We now consider the relationship between the intrinsic volumes, as de
fined in Chapter 4, and the invariant measure AI: defined on Graff( n, k).
Once again, fix an orthogonal coordinate system in Rn, and consider
88 7 The intrinsic volumes for poly convex sets
the lattice Par(n) of finite unions of parallelotopes with sides parallel to
this fixed coordinate system.
For A eRn, denote by Graff( A; k) the set of all V E Graff( n, k) such
that A n V =1= 0. The relationship between Ak and the intrinsic volumes
is given by the following theorem.
Theorem 7.2.1 For all parallelotopes P in Par(n),
P,nk(P) = C
k
Ak(Graff(P; k)) (7.1)
where the constants C
k
depend only on nand k.
Note that the equation (7.1) is asserted only for the case in which P
is a parallelotope and not for arbitrary elements of Par( n) (i.e. not for
all finite unions of parallelotopes). Theorem 7.2.1 immediately suggests
the following question: what are the values of the constants In
Section 9.3 we will prove the amazing fact that = 1, for all n 20 and
all 0 :s; k :s; n. However, much can be accomplished in the meantime. In
the course of proving Theorem 7.2.1, we shall need the following lemma.
Lemma 7.2.2 Let A and B be compact convex sets in Rn such that
A U B is convex. Let V be a linear variety of positive dimension such
that V n A =1= 0 and V n B =1= 0. Then V nAn B =1= 0.
Proof The set V n (A U B) = (V n A) U (V n B) is convex, since it is the
intersection of two convex sets.
If V nAn B is empty, then choose points a E (V n A)  (V n B)
and bE (V n B)  (V n A). Let 1 denote the straight line segment with
endpoints at a and b. Clearly 1 V. Since Au B is convex, we have
1 Au B, so that 1 = (1 n A) U (1 n B). Since 1 is connected and both
1 n A and 1 n B are closed, it follows that
1 n (A n B) = (1 n A) n (1 n B) =1= 0,
contradicting the assumption that V nAn B = 0. o
Lemma 7.2.2 can be restated as follows. If A and B are compact
convex sets such that A U B is convex, then for every k > 0 we have
Graff(A n B; k) = Graff(A; k) n Graff(B; k),
so that
Ak(Graff(A U B; k))
= Ak(Graff(A; k)) + Ak(Graff(B; k))  Ak(Graff(A n B; k)). (7.2)
7.2 The intrinsic volumes and Hadwiger's formula 89
We now turn to the proof of the theorem.
Proof of Theorem 7.2.1 To begin, define a function rJ on parallelotopes
by
rJ(P) = Ak(Graff(P; k)). (7.3)
It follows from (7.2) and Theorem 4.1.3 that rJ has a unique extension to
a valuation on all of Par(n) (although the equation (7.3) will not hold
for arbitrary finite unions of parallelotopes). Since Ak is invariant, so is
the valuation rJ.
Now suppose that P is a parallelotope, and let fp be the indicator
function of Graff(P; k) in Graff(n, k). In the language of the preceding
section we have
Ak(Graff(P; k)) = J fp dAk = J J !p(Vo,p) dpdvk(Vo), (7.4)
where p ranges over Vl.
For a fixed Vo E Gr(n, k), we have
!p(Vo,p) = fp(Vo + p) = 1
if and only if (Vo + p) n P I 0 (otherwise the function takes the value
zero); that is, if and only if p E PlVl, where PIVoJ.. denotes the orthog
onal projection of P onto the subspace Vl. In other words, the function
!p(Vo,p) is the indicator function of PIVoJ... For a > 0 we now have
Ak(Graff(aP; k))
so that
Ak(Graff(aP; k)) = ( volnk(aPlVl) dvk'(vo), (7.5)
JGr(n,k)
where volnk denotes the (n  k)dimensional volume in the (n  k)
dimensional space VoJ... Since (nk)dimensional volume is homogeneous
of degree n  k, we can continue:
rJ(aP) Ak(Graff(aP; k))
a
n

k
( volnk(PlVl) dvk'(vo)
JGr(n,k)
ankj l IplVLdPdvk'(vo)
Gr(n,k) VoL 0
90 7 The intrinsic volumes lor polyconvex sets
a
n

k
Xk(Graff(P; k))
ankrJ(P).
It follows that rJ is homogeneous of degree n  k on parallelotopes, and
consequently on all of Par(n). Since the (n  k)volume is continuous
on compact convex sets in vl, it also follows from (7.5) that rJ is a con
tinuous valuation. Therefore, by Corollary 4.2.6, there exists a constant
'Y'k E R such that
rJ(P) = 'YkJlnk(P)
for all P E Par(n). It is clear from (7.5) that rJ(P) > 0 if P has a
nonempty interior in Rn. It follows that 'Y'k =1= O. Setting C
k
= Ih'k,
we have
Jlnk(P) = C'k Ak(Graff(P; k))
for all parallelotopes P E Par( n). D
Theorem 7.2.1 relates the intrinsic volumes, as defined in Chapter 4 in
terms of product valuations, to the invariant measure Ak on Graff(n, k).
So far our main result asserts that the intrinsic volume Jlnk, which for
parallelotopes is evaluated as a symmetric function of the side lengths,
also evaluates the 'measure' of the set of kdimensional planes meeting
a given parallelotope. This interpretation extends to convex sets. The
obvious idea for the further extension of Jlnk to all polyconvex sets is to
use Groemer's extension Theorem 5.1.1; that is, to define a continuous
set function on a compact convex set K by
= CkAk(Graff(K;k)). (7.6)
It then follows from (7.2) and (7.5) that is a continuous valuation
on compact convex sets. Theorem 5.1.1 then asserts that has a
unique extension to all polyconvex sets in Rn. Note, however, that the
equation (7.6) is valid only if K is convex.
Alternatively, we can give a more constructive definition for on
Polycon( n). It turns out that we can let the Euler characteristic do most
of the work. To motivate this method, recall the definition of Jlnk on
Par(n) as a product valuation. Let I be any simple function on Par(n).
We have shown that
J I dJlnk = L J J ... J I(Xl, X2,., xn) dJl&(Xo(l)) dJl&(xo(2))
0
7.2 The intrinsic volumes and Hadwiger's formula 91
where the sum ranges over all permutations (J' of the set {I, 2, ... ,n}.
The integral
J J ... J f(xI, X2,, xn) dfL6(XI)'" dfL6(xk) (7.7)
can be rewritten as follows. Let V be the linear variety of dimension
k parallel to the linear subspace spanned by Xl, X2, ... , X k, and passing
through the point 0, ... ,0, Xk+l, ... , X
n
. Let A E Polycon(n) , and let
f = h Then the integral (7.7) simplifies to
J J ... J hfv dfL6(XI)'" dfL6(xk) = fLo(A n V).
To indicate the dependence of V on the coordinates Xk+l, Xk+2,, Xn,
let us write V = V(Xk+l,'" ,x
n). We then have
J fA dfLnk = L J J ... J fLo (A n V(Xo(k+l) , ... ,Xo(n)))
0
This formula suggests replacing the summation over the symmetric group
of permutations by integration over the space Gr(n, k) relative to the
invariant measure v'k. Specifically, let V (Vo; p) be the linear variety of
dimension k parallel to the linear subspace Vo, and intersecting the linear
subspace vl at the point p E Rn. We then obtain
J J fLo (A n V(Vo;p)) dv'k(vo).
This can be simplified further, since the integration is practically carried
out over the invariant measure on Graff(n, k). For all A E Polycon(n),
define
= C'k J fLo (A n V) dAk(V)
(7.8)
This formula is known as Hadwiger's formula. The integral ranges over
all V E Graff(n, k). It is easily verified that as extended by (7.8),
is a convexcontinuous invariant valuation on Polycon(n).
Note that fLo(K n V) = fGraff(K;k) (V) if K is a compact convex set.
Hadwiger's formula (7.8) then implies that
= C'kAk(Graff(K;k)).
Thus, the valuation defined by (7.8) agrees with the alternative ex
tension (7.6) as well as with Theorem 7.2.1. However, the equation (7.8)
92 7 The intrinsic volumes for polyconvex sets
defines intrinsic volumes on every polyconvex set A, giving the desired
extension explicitly.
Recall that the intrinsic volume /tk was called 'intrinsic,' because
/tk(P) remains the same for a parallelotope P, even if P is rigidly embed
ded within a higher dimensional space. In other words, the valuations
/tk on Par(n) are normalized independently of n (see Theorem 4.2.2).
We shall see later that this property carries over to the extension of /tk
given by (7.8), so that our use of the term 'intrinsic' remains justified
(see Theorem 8.4.1). One way to see this is to let K E Kn, embed Rn
into Rn+l, and compare /t!:;(K) with as given by (7.8). The
value of is given as the measure of all (n  k + 1 )dimensional planes
in Rn+l that meet K. Since a generic (n  k + l)plane in Rn+l meets
Rn in a plane of dimension n  k, the measure of all (n  k + l)planes
meeting K in Rn+l is proportional to the number of (n  k)planes
meeting K in Rn, where the proportionality constant is independent of
K, and is given by the measure (in the appropriate sense) of (n  k + 1)
planes in Rn+l containing a given (fixed) (n  k)plane. If we call this
proportionality constant we have
for all K E Polycon(n). Meanwhile, Theorem 4.2.2 asserts =
/t!:;(P) for all P E Par(n). It follows that = 1, and the intrinsic
volumes are universally normalized.
The problem in this argument is the claim that the measure of all
(n  k + l)planes meeting K in Rn+l is proportional to the number of
(nk)planes meeting K in Rn. This statement, although true, requires
additional measuretheoretic detail in order to be made precise. Instead,
we defer a rigorous proof of the universal normalization to Section 8.4.
For the interim, and in order to avoid ambiguity, we will continue to
use the notation /t!:; for the kth intrinsic volume on Polycon( n) until we
are able to prove the normalization property rigorously in Theorem 8.4.1.
We will make an exception for /to, which is clearly normalized indepen
dently of the ambient space Rn, since /to(K) = 1 for all nonempty
compact convex sets K.
We are now in a position to generalize the results of Section 1.2. Let K
and L be compact convex sets in Rn. Suppose that L has dimension n,
and that K L. Then Graff(K; k) Graff(L; k), and the conditional
probability that a linear variety of dimension k shall meet K, given that
7.3 An Euler relation for the intrinsic volumes 93
it meets L, is given by the ratio
Ak(Graff(K; k))
Ak(Graff(L; k)) .
From (7.6) and (7.8) we now deduce the following.
Theorem 7.2.3 (Sylvester's theorem) Let K L be compact convex
sets. Suppose that L is of dimension n. The conditional probability that
a linear variety of dimension k shall meet K, given that it meets L, is
given by
.
D
Note that this probability can be computed relative to any invariant
measure on Graff(n, k). The normalizing constants C
k
are irrelevant,
since they cancel in the ratio above.
7.3 An Euler relation for the intrinsic volumes
The Euler characteristic formula of Theorem 5.2.4 generalizes to intrinsic
volumes. To this end, we recall from Theorem 5.2.3 that the Euler
characteristic for the interior of a convex polytope P of dimension n is
given by
J.lo(int P) = (_l)n.
Let P be a compact convex polytope. For almost all V E Graff( n, n 
k) (with respect to the measure we have relint(P) n V =I 0 when
ever P n V =I 0. Hadwiger's formula (7.8) then implies that
J.lk (relint(P))
= C
k
r J.lo(relint(P) n V)
}vEGraff(n,nk)
= C
k
r (_l)dim(relint(p)nv) J.lo(P n V)
}vEGraff(n,nk)
Note that if relint(P) n V =I 0, then
dim(relint(P) n V) = dim(P n V) = dimP + dim V  dim(P U V),
where dim(PUV) denotes the dimension of the smallest plane containing
94 7 The intrinsic volumes for poly convex sets
PUV. If J1k(relint(P)) =I 0, then dimP 2': k. Therefore, dim(PUV) = n
for almost all V E Graff( n, n  k). It follows that
dim(relint(P) n V) = dimP + (n  k)  n = dimP  k,
and we obtain the formula
J1k(relint(P)) = (l)dimPk
J1k
(P)
(7.9)
for all convex polytopes P.
From Hadwiger's formula (7.8) we now derive Euler relations for the
intrinsic volumes of an arbitrary polytope P. As in Section 5.2, we define
a system of faces of P to be a family F of compact convex polytopes
such that if Q,Q' E F and Q =I Q' then (relint(Q)) n (relint(Q')) = 0,
and such that
U (relint( Q)) = P.
QEF
Under these conditions, the formula (7.9) yields at once
J1k(P) = 2: (_l)dim
Q
k J1k(Q)
QEF
7.4 The mean projection formula
We conclude this section with an alternative interpretation of Hadwiger's
formula (7.8) for compact convex sets.
Theorem 7.4.1 (The mean projection formula) For all K E Kn,
J1k(K) = C;;:k r J1Z(KlVo) dvk'(vo).
JGr(n,k)
Recall that J1Z denotes the kdimensional volume on each kdimensional
subspace of Rn. Theorem 7.4.1 states that the kth intrinsic volume
J1k(K) is proportional to the mean of the kvolumes of the orthogonal
projections of K onto all kdimensional subspaces of Rn.
Proof For K E Kn, we have
n  k))
C;;:k r r fK(Vo,P) dp dV;;:_k(Vo)
JGr(n,nk) JVl
7.5 Notes 95
Recall that lK(Vo,p) = 1 if Kn(Vo+p) I 0 and is zero otherwise. Since
K n (Vo + p) I 0 if and only if p lies inside the projection KlVl, we
have lK(Vo,p) = IKlVl(p). Therefore,
n  k))
r 1 IKlVo(p) dp
JGr(n,nk) vl
r
JGr(n,nk)
r dvk'(Vo),
JGr(n,k)
where the last equality follows from the fact that the orthogonal duality
between Gr(n, k) and Gr(n, n  k) preserves measure. D
Note that the preceding argument also yields
n  k)) = r dvk'(Vo)
JGr(n,k)
for all polyconvex sets K. However, since (7.6) defines for convex sets
only, Theorem 7.4.1 need not hold for all K E Polycon(n).
7.5 Notes
A brief survey of Euler relations for valuations on Polycon(n) appeared
in [72, p. 218220]. See also [37, 39, 79, 80].
For a general reference on the theory of valuations on convex bodies,
see [71, 72] and [85]. For additional related integral geometric formulas
and applications, see also [82] and [99].
The theory of intrinsic volumes can be extended to partially ordered
sets. Let P be a finite partially ordered set, with a unique minimal
element o. An order ideal of P is a subset A of P such that, if x E A and
y ::; x, then YEA. The set of all order ideals of P is denoted by L(P).
It is closed under unions and intersections; that is, it is a distributive
lattice. (It can be shown that every finite distributive lattice can be
represented in the form L(P) for some partially ordered set P). We
shall consider valuations on L(P). If x E P, denote by x the order ideal
consisting of all yEP such that y ::; x. A valuation f.1 on P will be
called invariant if f.1(A) = f.1(B) whenever the order ideals A and Bare
isomorphic as partially ordered sets.
It can be shown that every valuation f.1 on L(P) extends uniquely to
the Boolean algebra of all subsets of P, and that a valuation is uniquely
96 7 The intrinsic volumes for polyconvex sets
determined by assigning the value f.1(x) for each x E P. We typically
consider only valuations such that f.1(a) = O.
There are always at least two invariant valuations on P, namely, the
size;
a(A) = IAI 1, A =1= {a},
and the Euler characteristic, which is uniquely determined by setting
f.10(x) = 1 if x =1= {a}.
It can be shown (see [78, 79, 80]) that the Euler characteristic is closely
related to the Mobius function of P; that is, the integervalued function
on P uniquely defined by the conditions
One finds that
f.1(a,8) = 1
Lf.1(8,q) = 0, p > 8.
f.1o(A) =  L f.1(8,p).
pEA,p#8
Thus, one obtains a generalization of the expression for the Euler char
acteristic in terms of the 'number of faces'. Several special cases have
already been studied in detail.
Other invariant valuations are defined as follows. Let ex be an isomor
phism class of 'simplices' X. For every A E (P), let f.1a be the number of
x of class ex contained in A. We conjecture that the f.1a and f.1o span the
vector space of all invariant valuations. The identities holding among
the f.1a are particularly interesting to determine.
Actually, the theory of invariant valuations on partially ordered sets
should proceed along general lines. There is a more general notion of
invariant measure that deals with arbitrary segments [x, y] of P, rather
than just segments x = [0, x]. Such valuations can be multiplied in
a way that resembles multiplication in the incidence algebra of P (see
[78, 79, 92]).
There is more than one gap in the analogy between the discrete and
the continuous case. On the one hand, the ease with which the theory
of invariant valuations can be carried over to arbitrary partially ordered
sets suggests the possibility of generalization of the intrinsic volumes to
a more general space than R n. On the other hand, the analogy between
(8) (or P(8)) and Mod(n) is deficient, since we do not consider order
7.5 Notes 97
ideals in Mod(n) (or Aff(n)) as our basic building blocks, but rather the
polyconvex sets. The difficulty here is that of singling out a sufficiently
ample class of order ideals in Mod(n) that can be taken as simplices (so
as to replace convex sets). Convexity on Grassmannians is at present
too unwieldy a notion, and somehow the Schubert cell structure of the
Grassmannian must be brought to bear on the problem (see, for example,
[74]).
8
A characterization theorem for volume
In this chapter we state and prove a fundamental theorem of geomet
ric probability, namely the characterization of volume on polyconvex
sets as a continuous rigid motion invariant simple valuation Polycon( n).
The characterization of volume will lead in turn to a straightforward
characterization for all of the intrinsic volumes (see Section 9.1). In Sec
tion 8.4 we verify the universal normalization of the intrinsic volumes.
In Section 8.5 we investigate a connection between volume and random
motions, leading to an analogue of the Buffon needle problem, in which
evenly spaced lines are replaced by a discrete additive subgroup of Rn.
The results of Section 8.5 will be used in Section 9.6 to solve the Buffon
needle problem in a still more general form.
8.1 Simple valuations on polyconvex sets
In this section we state and prove a characterization theorem for volume,
leading to a generalization of Theorem 4.2.4 to Polycon(n). Recall that
Theorem 4.2.4 characterized volume in two ways, one involving conti
nuity and the other involving monotonicity. It turns out to be much
easier to generalize Theorem 4.2.4 in the monotonic case than it is in
the continuous case.
Theorem 8.1.1 Suppose that JL is a monotone translation invariant
simple valuation on Polycon( n). Then there exists C E R such that
JL(K) = CJLn(K), for all K E Polycon(n).
Proof We shall assume without loss of generality that JL is an increasing
valuation, for, if JL is decreasing, then the valuation JL is increasing.
8.1 Simple valuations on polyconvex sets 99
Consider first the restriction of f.l to Par(n). By Theorem 4.2.4, there
exists c E R such that f.l(P) = Cf.ln(P), for all P E Par(n).
Next, consider K E Kn. Recall from the definition of volume in
elementary calculus that f.ln(K) is given by the supremum of f.ln(P)
over all P E Par( n) such that P K. Since f.l is increasing, we have
f.l(P) f.l(K) for all P K. In other words, Cf.ln(P) f.l(K) for all
P K. It follows that cf.ln(K) f.l(K).
Recall again that f.ln (K) is also given by the infimum of f.ln (P) over
all P E Par(n) such that K P. It then similarly follows that f.l(K)
cf.ln(K). Hence, f.l(K) = cf.ln(K), for all K E Kn, and therefore also for
all K E Polycon(n). 0
A characterization for volume as a continuous valuation, free of mono
tonicity conditions, requires considerably more work. We begin with
some preliminary definitions.
Recall from Section 5.1 that a nonempty compact convex set K E Kn
is determined uniquely by its support function hK : snl > R, defined
by h
K
( u) = maxxEK{ X u}, where denotes the standard inner product
on Rn. Recall also that, if vERn and v denotes the line segment with
endpoints v and v, then hv(u) = lu, vi, for all u E snl.
For K E Kn, denote by K the set {x : x E K}; that is, the
reflection of K through the origin. If K =  K we say that K is centered
or symmetric about the origin. A set K is centered or symmetric if some
translate of K is centered about the origin. Denote by the set of all
centered compact convex sets in Rn.
Recall that for compact convex sets K and L the Minkowski sum K + L
is defined by
K + L = {x + y : x E K and y E L},
and that hK+L = hK + hL .
A zonotope is a finite Minkowski sum of straight line segments. A
convex body Y is called a zonoid if Y can be approximated in Kn by
a convergent sequence of zonotopes [85, p. 183J. We shall need the
following useful fact concerning zonoids and smooth convex bodies. A
complete discussion of this result and its proof may be found in [26, 34,
85J.
Proposition 8.1.2 Let K E and suppose that the support function
hK is COO. Then there exist zonoids Y
1
, Y
2
such that
100 8 A characterization theorem for volume
Proof For 9 E coo(snl), the cosine transform of g, denoted Cg, is
given by the equation
Cg(u) = r Iu vlg(v) dv.
}Snl
The transform C is a bijective linear operator on the space of all even
Coo functions on snl. This fact is a consequence of Schur's lemma
(or the FunkeHecke theorem) for spherical harmonics [85, pp. 182189]
(see also [26, 34]).
Since the function hK : snl t R is Coo and even, there exists an
even Coo function 9 : snl t R such that hK = Cg; that is,
hK(U) = r Iu vlg(v) dv.
}Snl
Let g+(v) = max{g(v),O}, and let g(v) = max{g(v),O}. Then
hK(U)+ r Iu,vlg(v)dv= r Iu,vlg+(v)dv. (8.1)
}Snl }Snl
It is easy to check that the functions h
Y1
= Cg+ and h
Y2
= Cg each
satisfy the properties of a support function of a centered convex body,
which we denote by Yl and Y
2
respectively. The equation (8.1) is then
equivalent to the statement that K + Y
2
= Y
1
. Moreover, since the Rie
mann sums converging to the integrals in (8.1) are linear combinations of
support functions of line segments (Le. support functions of zonotopes),
it follows that Y
1
and Y
2
are zonoids. 0
Let SO(n) denote the special orthogonal group; that is, the set of all
rotations of R n. Let B = {el' ... , en} denote the standard basis for R n ,
and denote by SO(n, B) the set of all rotations in SO(n) that fix at least
n  2 elements of the basis B.
Proposition 8.1.3 Suppose that 1> E SO(n). Then there exists a finite
collection 1>1,1>2, ... , 1>m E SO(n, B) such that 1> = 1>11>2'" 1>m
Proof The proposition holds trivially in dimension n = 2, since SO(2, B)
= SO(2). Suppose that n 2: 3 and that the proposition holds for dimen
sion n  1.
Let 1> E SO(n), and suppose that 1> tj SO(n, B). Let v = 1>e
n
, and
assume without loss of generality that v =I= en. Let v' denote the unit nor
malization of the orthogonal projection of v onto Span{ el, ... , enI} =
Rnl. There exists 'l/J E SO(n) such that 'l/Je
n
= en and 'l/Jv' = enI. As
v lies within Span { v', en}, it follows that 'l/Jv lies within Span { enI, en}.
8.1 Simple valuations on polyconvex sets 101
Let ( be the rotation that fixes e1, ... ,e
n
2 and rotates 'lj;v to en. Then
( E SO(n, B), and ('lj;e
n
= ('lj;v = en Let 7] = ('lj;.
Since 'lj; and 7] both fix en, it follows from the induction assumption
on SO(n  1) that there exist 'lj;1,' .. 'lj;i, 7]1, ... 7]j E SO(n, B) such that
'lj; = 'lj;1 ... 'lj;i and 7] = 7]1 ... 7]j. Thus,
= 'lj;lC
l
7] = 'lj;:;1 ... 'lj;llC
l
7]l ... 7]j.
D
A valuation JL on Kn is said to be simple if JL vanishes on sets of
dimension less than n.
Theorem 8.1.4 Suppose that JL is a continuous translation invariant
simple valuation on Kn. Suppose also that JL([O,l]n) = 0, and that
JL(K) = JL(K), for all K E Kn. Then JL(K) = 0, for all K E Kn.
Here [O,l]n denotes the nfold Cartesian product of the closed unit
interval [0, 1] with itself; that is, a unit ncube.
Proof If n = 1 then the result follows readily, since a compact convex
subset of R is merely a closed line segment. Since JL is simple and
vanishes on the closed line segment [0,1]' it must vanish on all closed
line segments of rational length. It then follows from continuity that JL
vanishes on all closed line segments.
For n > 1, assume that Theorem 8.1.4 holds for valuations on Kn1.
Since JL is translation invariant and simple, the fact that JL( [0, l]n) =
implies that JL([O, l/k]n) = for all integers k > 0. Therefore, JL(C) =
for every box C of rational dimensions, with sides parallel to the
coordinate axes. This follows from the fact that such a box can be built
up out of cubes of the form [0, l/k]n for some k > 0. The continuity of JL
then implies that JL( C) = for every box C of positive real dimensions,
with sides parallel to the coordinate axes.
Next, suppose that D is a box with sides parallel to a different set
of orthogonal axes. If n = 2 then it is easy to see that D can be cut
into a finite number of pieces, translations of which can be pasted to
form a box C with sides parallel to the original coordinate axes (see
Figure 8.1). Since JL is simple and translation invariant, it follows that
JL(D) = JL(C) = 0. If n > 2, then for all rotations (E SO(n,B), a box
with sides parallel to the basis (B can be cut, translated, and repasted
into a box parallel to B, using precisely the operations followed in the
case n = 2. This works because the rotation ( fixes at least n  2 of
the original coordinate axes. More generally, for 'lj; E SO(n), Propo
sition 8.1.3 states that 'lj; is a finite product of elements of SO(n, B).
102 8 A characterization theorem for volume
________ 1
Fig. 8.1. Reorient a frame without use of rotations.
Therefore, a box with sides parallel to the basis 'If;E can be cut, trans
lated, and repasted into a box parallel to E, using a finite iteration of
operations of the type used in the case n = 2.
It follows that, if D is a box with sides parallel to any orthogonal frame
in Rn, then D can be transformed into a box C with sides parallel to the
original coordinate axes, by means of cutting, pasting, and translations.
Therefore, we have p,(D) = p,(C) = O.
Next, define a valuation 7 on Knl as follows. Given a compact convex
subset K of R
n

l
, set
7(K) = p,(K x [0,1]).
Note that 7([0, l]nl) = p,([o,l]n) = O. Notice also that 7 satisfies
the hypotheses of Theorem 8.1.4 in dimension n  1. The induction
hypothesis then implies that 7 = O.
Since p, is simple, it follows that p,(K x [a, b]) = 0, for any convex
body K R
n

l
and any rational numbers a and b, with a :::; b. The
continuity of p, then implies that p,(K x [a, b]) = 0 for all a, bE R. Said
differently, p, is zero on any right cylinder with a convex base.
Let Xl, ... ,X
n
be the coordinates on R n. We can represent R nl by
the hyperplane Xn = O. The right cylinders for which we have shown p,
to be zero have tops and bottoms that are congruent and that lie directly
above and below each other. In other words, the edges connecting the
top face to the bottom face are orthogonal to the hyperplane Xn = O.
This process can be applied to right cylinders with base in any (n1)
dimensional subspace of Rn. Since p, = 0 on boxes in every orientation,
it follows (from the preceding argument) that p, = 0 on right cylinders
of every orientation.
Suppose that M is a prism, or slanting cylinder, for which the top and
bottom faces are congruent and both parallel to the hyperplane Xn =
8.1 Simple valuations on polyconvex sets 103
Fig. 8.2. Turn a prism into a right cylinder.
0, but whose cylindrical boundary is no longer orthogonal to Xn = 0,
meeting it instead at some constant angle. See Figure 8.2.
Cut M into two pieces, MI and M
2
, separated by a hyperplane that
is orthogonal to the cylindrical boundary of the prism. Rearrange the
pieces Mi and repaste them together along the original (and congru
ent) top and bottom faces. We are then left with a right cylinder C
whose surrounding boundary is orthogonal to the new top and bot
tom faces. Since f.1 remains constant under this operation, it follows
that
(Actually, such a cutting and rearrangement is possible only if the
diameter of the top/bottom of M is sufficiently small compared with
the height and angle of the cylindrical boundary; i.e. provided that M
is not too 'fat'. If the base of M is too large, however, we can subdivide
M into 'skinny' prisms by subdividing the top/bottom of M into convex
bodies of sufficiently small diameter and considering separately each
prism formed by taking the convex hull of the (disjoint) union of a piece
of the bottom of M with its corresponding congruent piece of the top of
M.)
Now let P be a convex polytope having facets PI, ... , Pm, and corre
sponding outward unit normal vectors UI, ... , U
m
. Let v ERn, and let
v denote the straight line segment connecting the point v to the origin
o. Without loss of generality, let us assume that PI, ... ,P
j
are exactly
those facets of P such that Ui . v > 0, for each 1 i j. In this case,
104 8 A characterization theorem for volume
the Minkowski sum P + v can be expressed in the form
where each term of the above union is either disjoint from the others,
or intersects another in a convex body of dimension at most n  1. It
follows that
Notice, however, that each term of the form Pi + v is a prism, so that
f.1(P
i
+ v) = 0. Hence,
f.1(P + v) = f.1(P),
(8.2)
for all convex polytopes P and all line segments V.
By induction over finite Minkowski sums of line segments, it immedi
ately follows from (8.2) that, for all convex polytopes P and all zonotopes
Z,
f.1(Z) = 0, and f.1(P + Z) = f.1(P).
The continuity of f.1 then implies that
f.1(Y) = 0, and f.1(K + Y) = f.1(K), (8.3)
for all K E K
n
and all zonoids Y.
Next, suppose that K E has a Coo support function h
K
. By
Proposition 8.1.2, there exist zonoids Y
1
and Y
2
such that K + Y
2
= Y
1
.
In this case, (8.3) implies that
f.1(K) = f.1(K + 1'2) = f.1(Y1) = 0.
Since any centered convex body K can be approximated by a sequence
Ki of Coo centered convex bodies, it follows (by continuity) that f.1 is
zero on all of
Now let .6. be an ndimensional simplex, with one vertex at the origin.
Let Ul, ... ,Un denote the other vertices of .6., and let P be the parallelo
tope spanned by the vectors Ul,"" Un. Let v = Ul + ... + Un. Let 6
be the hyperplane passing through the points Ul, ... , Un, and let 6 be
the hyperplane passing through the points v  Ul, .. ,v  Un. Finally,
denote by P* the set of all points of P lying between the hyperplanes 6
and 6. We can now write
P = .6. U P* U (.6. + v),
8.1 Simple valuations on polyconvex sets 105
where each term of the union intersects another in dimension at most
n  1. Since P and P* are centered, we have
0= p,(P) = p,(I:::.) + p,(P*) + p,( I:::. + v) = p,(I:::.) + p,( 1:::.).
In other words, p,(I:::.) = p,( 1:::.). Meanwhile, we are given that p,(I:::.) =
p,( 1:::.). Therefore p,(I:::.) = 0, for any simplex 1:::..
Let P be a convex polytope in Rn. The polytope P can be expressed
as a finite union of simplices
such that the intersection I:::.
i
n I:::.
j
has dimension less than n, for all
i =I j. It follows that
m
p,(P) = "Lp,(l:::.i ) = O.
i=l
Since the set of all convex polytopes is dense in Kn, the continuity of p,
then implies that p,(K) = 0 for all K E Kn. D
Theorem 8.1.4 is equivalent to the following theorem.
Theorem 8.1.5 (The volume characterization theorem) Suppose
that p, is a continuous translation invariant simple valuation on Kn.
Then there exists c E R such that p,(K) + p,(K) = cp,n(K), for all
KEKn.
Note that Theorem 8.1.5 implies that p,(K) = (c/2)P,n(K) for all
centered convex bodies K E
Proof of equivalence Suppose that p, is a continuous translation invariant
simple valuation on Kn. For K E Kn, define
v(K) = p,(K) + p,( K)  2p,([0, l]n)P,n(K).
Then v satisfies the hypotheses of Theorem 8.1.4, so that v(K) = 0 for
all K E Kn. Therefore,
p,(K) + p,(  K) = cp,n(K),
where c = 2p,([0,1]n). Hence, Theorem 8.1.4 implies Theorem 8.1.5.
The reverse implication is obvious. D
106 8 A characterization theorem for volume
8.2 Even and odd valuations
A valuation f.1 on Kn is said to be even if
f.1(K) = f.1(K)
for all K E Kn. If
f.1(K) = f.1(K)
for all K E Kn then f.1 is said to be odd. Every valuation f.1 on Kn has a
decomposition
f.1 = f.1even + f.1odd,
where f.1even is the even valuation defined by
f.1even(K) = + f.1( K))
and f.1odd is the odd valuation defined by
f.1odd(K) =  f.1(K)).
Theorem 8.1.5 implies that the volume f.1n is the only continuous, trans
lation invariant, even, simple valuation on Kn, up to a constant factor.
More generally, for any continuous, translation invariant, simple valua
tion f.1, there exists C E R such that
f.1(K) = cf.1n(K) + f.1odd(K)
(8.4)
for all K.
A natural question at this point is that of whether the property of
evenness is necessary to characterize volume. Do there exist any non
trivial continuous, translation invariant, odd, simple valuations? The
answer turns out to be yes, even in the case of dimension 2. For ex
ample, let .6. denote the equilateral triangle in R
2
of unit side length,
centered at the origin and with a side parallel to the xaxis. Define a
valuation 'T/ on K2 by the equation
(8.5)
It is clear that 'T/ is a translation invariant continuous function of K. To
see that 'T/ is a valuation, we require the following proposition.
Proposition 8.2.1 Suppose K, L, M E Kn such that K U L is convex.
Then
(K U L) + M = (K + M) U (L + M), (8.6)
8.2 Even and odd valuations 107
and
(KnL) +M = (K +M) n (L+M). (8.7)
Proof The equation (8.6) is obvious, even when K U L is not convex.
To prove (8.7), suppose that x E (K n L) + M. Then x = y + m, where
y E KnL and m EM. Evidently x E K +M and x E L+M, so that
(K n L) + M (K + M) n (L + M).
Next, suppose that x E (K +M)n(L+M). Then x = a+ml = b+m2,
where a E K, bEL, and ml,m2 E M. Since K U L is convex, with
K and L each compact, the line segment with endpoints at a and b
must contain a point y E K n L, which we can express in the form
y = (1  t)a + tb for some 0 :s:; t :s:; 1. Let m = (1  t)ml + tm2. Since
M is convex, mE M, and y + mE (K n L) + M. Meanwhile,
y + m = (1  t)a + tb + (1  t)ml + tm2 = (1  t)x + tx = x,
so that x E (K n L) + M, and
(K n L) + M (K + M) n (L + M).
This completes the proof. o
Now suppose that K, L E K} such that K U L is convex. If we set
M = .6. then Proposition 8.2.1 implies that
Jl2((K U L) +.6.) + Jl2((K n L) +.6.)
= Jl2((K +.6.) U (L + .6.)) + Jl2((K +.6.) n (L + .6.))
= Jl2(K +.6.) + Jl2(L + .6.),
and similarly if.6. is replaced with .6.. Consequently, we have
77(K U L) + 77(K n L) = 77(K) + 77(L).
Moreover, since Jl2 is even,
77(K) = Jl2(K +.6.)  Jl2(K + (.6.)) = Jl2(K + (.6.))
Jl2(K +.6.)
77(K),
so that 77 is an odd valuation on K2.
108 8 A characterization theorem for volume
Fig. 8.3. The Minkowski sum 6 + (6).
It immediately follows that 'f} is simple! To see this, suppose that K
is a symmetric convex body; i.e., K = K. Then we have
'f}(K) = 'f}( K) = 'f}(K),
so that 'f}(K) = O. However, all points and line segments are symmetric
convex bodies, so that 'f} must vanish in dimensions 0 and 1.
Finally, we check that 'f} I O. The fact that 'f}(f:l.) I 0 follows easily
from the BrunnMinkowski inequality in the plane [85, p. 309]. However,
this fact can also be seen by a simple and direct computation. It can
be seen in Figure 8.3 that the Minkowski sum f:l. + (f:l.) is a regular
hexagon of unit edge length, having area
whereas
Hence,
/3
'f}(f:l.) = /12(f:l. + f:l.)  /12(f:l. + (f:l.)) = 2/12(f:l.) = 2" I o.
Shortly after the discovery of Theorem 8.1.5, which characterizes the
continuous translation invariant even simple valuations, Schneider used
an analogous approach to characterize the continuous translation invari
ant odd simple valuations. This led to the following theorem.
Theorem 8.2.2 (Schneider's characterization theorem) Suppose
that /1 is a continuous translation invariant odd simple valuation on Kn.
Then there exists a continuous odd function 9 : snl > R and a
measure S K on snl such that
for all K E Kn.
/1(K) = r g(u) dSK
lSnl
o
8.3 The volume theorem 109
Here snl denotes the unit sphere in Rn. The measure SK is sometimes
called the AleksandrovFenchelJessen measure associated with K.
Since any continuous translation invariant simple valuation f..t can be
expressed as a sum f..t = f..teven + f..todd of even and odd valuations, Theo
rems 8.1.5 and 8.2.2 combine to improve the characterization (8.4). In
other words, a continuous translation invariant simple valuation f..t must
have the form
f..t(K) = cf..tn(K) + r g(u) dSK ,
}Snl
where c E Rand 9 : snl t R is a continuous odd function.
8.3 The volume theorem
In order to generalize Theorem 4.2.4 to the lattice Polycon(n), we require
the following proposition relating rotation invariance to invariance under
reflections.
Proposition 8.3.1 (Sah) Let .6. be an ndimensional simplex. There
exist polytopes PI, ... , Pm such that
where each term of this union intersects another in dimension at most
n 1, and where each of the polytopes Pi is symmetric under a reflection
across a hyperplane.
Proof Let xo, ... , Xn be the vertices of .6., and let .6.
i
be the facet of .6.
opposite to Xi. Let Z be the center of the inscribed sphere of .6., and let
Zi be the foot of the perpendicular from Z to the facet .6.
i
. For all i < j,
let Ai,j denote the convex hull of Z, Zi, Zj, and the face .6.
i
n .6. j . Then
.6. = U Ai,j,
where the distinct terms Ai,j of this union intersect in at most dimension
n1. It is also evident that each Ai,j is symmetric under reflection across
the n  1 hyperplane determined by the point Z and the face .6.
i
n .6.
j
Now relabel the polytopes Ai,j by a linear ordering PI' ... ' Pm, where
m = + 1). This gives
.6. = PI U U Pm,
where the polytopes Pi satisfy the desired conditions. o
110 8 A characterization theorem for volume
We now generalize Theorem 4.2.4 to the lattice Polycon(n).
Theorem 8.3.2 (The volume theorem for Polycon( n)) Suppose that
f1 is a continuous rigid motion invariant simple valuation on Kn (or
Polycon(n)). Then there exists c E R such that f1(K) = Cf1n(K), for all
K E Kn (or Polycon(n)).
Recall from Groemer's extension Theorem 5.1.1 that a convexcontin
uous valuation is well defined on Polycon( n) if and only if it is well
defined on the generating set Kn.
Proof Since f1 is translation invariant (as well as rotation invariant)
and simple, Theorem 8.1.5 implies the existence of a E R such that
f1(K) + f1( K) = af1n(K), for all K E Kn.
Let .6. be a simplex in R n. Then we have
(8.8)
If the dimension n of the ambient Euclidean space is even, then .6. differs
from .6. by a rotation, so that
Meanwhile, if n is odd, from Proposition 8.3.1 there exist polytopes
PI,"" Pm such that
where each term of this union intersects another in dimension at most
n 1, and where each of the polytopes Pi is symmetric under a reflection
across a hyperplane.
It follows that each Pi differs from  Pi by a proper rigid motion
(i.e. by a rotation followed by a translation), so that f1( Pi) = f1(Pi).
Therefore,
m m
(8.9)
i=l i=l
Taken together, (8.8) and (8.9) imply that f1(.6.) = (a/2)f1n(.6.) for any
simplex .6..
Let c = a/2, and suppose that P is a convex polytope in Rn. The
polytope P can be expressed as a finite union of simplices
8.4 The normalization of the intrinsic volumes 111
such that the intersection n has dimension less than n, for all
i =1= j. It follows that
M(P) + ... +
+ ... +
CMn(P).
Since the set of all convex polytopes is dense in Kn, the continuity of M
then implies that M(K) = CMn(K) for all K E Kn. This concludes the
proof of Theorem 8.3.2. 0
8.4 The normalization of the intrinsic volumes
Recall from Theorem 4.2.2 that if P is a parallelotope in Rl, and if we
consider Rl Rn for some n > l, then Ml(p) = M'k(P), for all k o.
We will now show that this universal normalization holds when P is
replaced by any polyconvex set.
Theorem 8.4.1 (The universal normalization theorem)
The valuations Mi on Polycon(n) are normalized independently of the
dimension n.
Proof Theorem 8.4.1 clearly holds for i = 0, since Mo(K) = Mo(K) = 1
for all nonempty compact convex subsets of R n for all dimensions n.
Moreover, it is clear that restricts to Ml for all l < k, since both
valuations are identically zero on polyconvex sets of dimension l < k.
Let n > k, and suppose that
restricts to Ml for all k l n  1. (8.10)
We need to show that the condition (8.10) holds for M'k as well.
Since M'k vanishes in dimension less than k, the restriction of M'k to a
kdimensional plane in Rn is a continuous, invariant, simple valuation
on Polycon(k). By the Volume Theorem 8.3.2 there exists C E R such
that M'k(K) = for all K E Polycon(k). Since M'k(P) = for
all parallelotopes P E Par(k) (by Theorem 4.2.2), it follows that C = 1
and M'k = on Polycon(k).
If k = n  1 then we have achieved our goal. If k < n  1, suppose
that
M'k restricts to Ml for some k l < n  1. (8.11)
112 8 A characterization theorem for volume
To complete the induction step and prove the theorem, we need to show
that the condition (8.11) holds for Ikk and as well.
Denote by v the restriction of 11k to Polycon( l + 1). Then v restricts to
on Polycon(l) by the condition (8.11), whereas restricts to on
Polycon(l) by the condition (8.10). It follows that v  vanishes on
Polycon(l), so that v  is a continuous invariant simple valuation
on Polycon(l + 1). By Theorem 8.3.2 there exists c E R such that
v  = cl1lti on Polycon(l + 1). Since v  vanishes on all of
Par(l + 1) by Theorem 4.2.2, we have c = 0 and v = I. The theorem
now follows by double induction, first on l and then on n. 0
Henceforth we are justified in omitting reference to ambient spaces
when discussing the intrinsic volumes, and so we shall simplify the no
tation 11k to 11k. The induction technique used in the proof of Theo
rem 8.4.1 actually leads to a much more powerful result, with which we
shall begin Chapter 9.
8.5 Lattice points and volume
Let B = {VI, ... , v
n
} be a basis for R n, and let denote the collection
of points in R n consisting of all vectors having integer coordinates with
respect to B; that is,
={alvl++anvn al, ... ,anEZ}.
Here Z denotes the set of integers.
The set forms a discrete subgroup of R n with respect to vector addi
tion. Discrete subgroups of R n are traditionally called lattices, and the
elements of a lattice are called lattice points. Lattices in R n are not to
be confused with the distributive lattices of sets treated in the preceding
chapters although the two notions are related, this relation will not
be relevant in the present context. For the remainder of Chapter 8, the
term lattice will refer to discrete additive subgroups of R n.
In this section we ask the following question. If a convex body K
is moved in R n by a random Euclidean motion, what is the expected
number of lattice points to be found in K? In other words, what is
the expectation of the random variable IgK n 1, where 9 is a random
Euclidean motion? Using Theorem 8.1.1 we will show that this expected
number is proportional to the volume of K.
Let C denote the parallelotope
C = {alvl + ... +anv
n
0:::; al,.' .,a
n
:::; I}.
8.5 Lattice points and volume 113
The parallelotope G is called a fundamental domain for the lattice 'c. If
A is a matrix whose ith column is given by the coordinates of the vector
Vi (with respect to the standard orthonormal basis for R n), then the
volume of G is given by Jtn(G) = Idet AI.
Proposition 8.5.1 For any x E R
n
and any positive integer k, the
translate kG + x of kG contains at least k
n
points of ,C and at most
(k + l)n points of ,c.
Proof For x = XlVI + ... + XnVn the set (kG + x) n,C consists of all
vectors V = YI VI + ... + Yn Vn such that Xi ::; Yi ::; k + Xi. There are
either k or k + 1 possible integer values for Yi within this interval, for
each i E {I, ... , n}. Therefore kG + x contains between k
n
and (k + l)n
points of ,c. 0
We consider next a simplified version of our original question. Suppose
that a polyconvex set K is moved in Rn by a random translation x,
resulting in a new body K + x. What is the expected number of lattice
points in K + x?
Theorem 8.5.2 Let K E Polycon(n), and let XK denote the number
of points in the set (K + x) n,C, for a random translation x. Then the
expectation E(XK) is given by
E(X ) = Jtn(K)
K Jtn(G) .
Proof To begin, note that for x E Rn the number of lattice points in
K + x is given by Jto (( K + x) n ), where Jto is the Euler characteristic.
In order to compute the expectation E(XK) we must average over all
x E R
n
the function Jto(gK n ,c). This makes no sense, however, since
such an integral would diverge. Nonetheless, because ,C is symmetric
under the set of translations by points of 'c, it is sufficient to average
over the set of translations by vectors x E G. Thus we have
so that E(XK) is a translation invariant monotonically increasing val
uation in the parameter K. Evidently E(X
K
) = 0 if K has dimension
less than n, so the valuation E(XK) is also simple. It then follows from
114 8 A characterization theorem for volume
Theorem 8.1.1 that there exists Ct E R such that
(8.12)
for all K E Polycon(n).
To compute the constant Ct, consider K = C. For all positive integers
k, Proposition 8.5.1 asserts that
It then follows that
From (8.12) we then obtain
for all positive integers k. It follows that Ct = 1/ Jtn (C).
o
We are now able to answer the question of how many lattice points
are expected inside gK, for a random Euclidean motion g.
Theorem 8.5.3 Let K E Polycon(n), and let X
K
denote the number of
points in the set gK n , for a random Euclidean motion g. Then the
expectation E(XK) is given by
E(X ) = Jtn(K)
K Jtn(C)
Proof To begin, note that, for 9 E En, the number of lattice points in
gK is given by Jto(gK n C), where Jto is the Euler characteristic. In
order to compute the expectation E(XK) we must average the function
Jto(gKn) over all motions g. Again this appears to make no sense, since
the required integral would diverge. However, because is symmetric
under the set of translations by points of , it is sufficient to average over
the set of motions En consisting of any rotation or reflection E O(n)
followed by a translation by a vector x E C. Hence, we have
E(XK) = k Jto(gKn)dg
En
r r Jto((K+x)n)dxd,
JO(n) Jc
8.6 Remarks on Hilbert's third problem 115
where the integrals are taken with respect to the unique invariant prob
ability measures on C and O(n). Since
1
Jtn(K) Jtn(K)
cJto((K +x) nC)dx = Jtn(C) = Jtn(C)
by Theorem 8.5.2, it follows that
as well.
8.6 Remarks on Hilbert's third problem
o
Let P be a polytope in R n. A dissection of P is an expression of P as
a union
of polytopes PI, ... , Pm such that each intersection Pi nP
j
has dimension
less than n for all i f j.
Two polytopes P and Q in R n are said to be scissors congruent if there
exist dissections of P and Q into a finite set of polytopes PI, P
2
, ... , Pm
and Ql , Q2, ... , Q m respectively, such that each Pi is congruent to Q i by
some rigid motion of Rn; that is, such that for each i we have = giQi
for some rigid motion gi of Rn. It is clear that, if P and Q are scissors
congruent, then they have the same volume: Jtn(P) = Jtn(Q).
At the Paris International Congress of Mathematicians in 1900, David
Hilbert posed the converse question (see [44]): if two polytopes P and Q
in Rn have the same volume, are they necessarily scissors congruent?
This question, along with subsequent variations, has come to be known
as Hilbert's third problem.
It can easily be shown that the answer is 'yes' for polytopes in the
plane; that is, if n = 2 (see [81, p. 5]). For dimensions n 3, however,
a negative answer was given by Dehn in [19] only a year after Hilbert
had posed the problem (see also [8, 81]).
Dehn discovered a functional 1jJ on the set of polytopes in R
n
(for
n 3), known as the Dehn invariant, such that 1jJ(P) = 1jJ(Q) whenever
P and Q are scissors congruent. He then exhibited two polytopes P and
Q having the same volume such that 1jJ(P) f 1jJ(Q).
In modern parlance the term 'Dehn invariant' actually refers to a fam
ily of scissors congruence invariant functionals that distinguish between
116 8 A characterization theorem for volume
some polytopes ofthe same volume. An example in R3 is constructed as
follows. Let a = (arccos(I/3))/1f, and note that a is irrational (see, for
example, [8, p. 102]). Recall again that R is a vector space of infinite
dimension over the field Q of rational numbers. Let f : R t R be
a Qlinear functional on R such that f(l) = 0 and f(a) = 1. (Such
a function is possible because a is irrational.) For a compact convex
polyhedron P in R3, let M
I
, ... , Mm denote the edges of P, and let
(h, ... ,()m denote the outer dihedral angles between the facets adjacent
to each corresponding edge. Define
With some effort one verifies that 'IjJ is invariant under scissors congru
ence. Let .6. denote the regular tetrahedron in R3 having unit volume.
Since the dihedral angle between any two adjacent facets of .6. is given
by arccos(I/3), we have 'IjJ(.6.) > O. Meanwhile, the unit cube C in R3
has outer dihedral angles 31f /2, so that 'IjJ( C) = O. It follows that C and
.6. are not scissors congruent, in spite of having the same volume.
A more general form of Dehn invariant is given in terms of tensor
products (see also [81, p. 2]). Suppose n 2: 3, and let P be a compact
convex polytope in Rn having (n  2)dimensional faces M
I
, ... , Mm.
Let ()I,"" ()m denote the angles between the facets adjacent to each
corresponding (n  2)face. Denote by R/Z the normalized circle group,
and let R @Z R/Z denote the tensor product of the Abelian groups R
and R/Z. Define a functional W : pn t R @Z R/Z by
The functional W is a Dehn invariant for all n 2: 3.
Hilbert's original question has many variations. Let G be any group of
rigid motions of Rn, for example, the group of translations, or some finite
group of symmetries. We say that two polytopes P and Q are scissors
congruent with respect to G if there exist dissections of P and Q into a
finite set of polytopes PI, P2, ... , Pm and QI, Q2, ... , Qm respectively, so
that each Pi is congruent to Qi by some motion in G; that is, so that for
each i we have Pi = giQi for some gi E G. Once again it is clear that, if
P and Q are scissors congruent with respect to G, then Jtn(P) = Jtn(Q).
Once again one may pose the converse question. The answer remains in
the negative for n 2: 3, but, for the case n = 2 (the Euclidean plane),
8.7 Notes 117
the answer is more interesting. In particular, suppose that G = T
2
, the
set of all translations of the plane. In this case Hilbert's question has
once again a negative answer, even in the plane! This follows from our
construction (8.5) of the valuation TJ in Section 8.2. Recall that TJ was
defined by
where K E K2 and is the equilateral triangle of unit side length, cen
tered at the origin. The valuation TJ is simple and translation invariant.
It follows that, if P and Q are polygons in R2 that are scissors con
gruent with respect to T
2
, then TJ(P) = TJ(Q). However, recall also that
TJ(K) = 0 whenever K is a centered convex body (such as a rectangle),
while I O. Let P = and let Q be a square with the same area
as P. Since TJ(P) I TJ(Q), the polygons P and Q cannot be scissors
congruent with respect to the translation group T
2
.
In view of Theorem 8.1.5, one might suspect that the answer to
Hilbert's third problem is once again 'Yes' in dimension 2, provided
that we allow the group G to contain both the translations of the plane
and the reflection through the origin (corresponding to scalar multipli
cation by 1). Indeed, this was shown to be true by Hadwiger and Glur
in [40]. A detailed treatment of the results of Hadwiger and Glur may
also be found in [8, pp. 6992] and [81].
The remarks in this section give only a hint of the beauty and complex
ity to be found in the study of polytopes, dissections, and congruences.
For a more thorough treatment of this theory, see [8, 71, 81].
8.7 Notes
Theorem 8.3.2 is due to Hadwiger, who gave a long and difficult proof in
[39]. The more general Theorem 8.1.5 is due to Klain [50]. Schneider's
characterization theorem appeared in [86]. Proposition 8.3.1 is due to
Sah [81, pp. 1617]. For a discussion of spherical harmonics and other
background for Proposition 8.1.2, see [85, p. 184] and [33,34].
Theorem 8.1.5 leads in turn to a connection between continuous even
valuations on compact convex sets and continuous functions on Grass
mannians. This connection can be described in part by using generating
distributions for symmetric compact convex sets. For a detailed discus
sion, see [54]. The question of how to characterize volume as a valuation
on defined only on polytopes remains open (see [72]).
9
Hadwiger's characterization theorem
In Section 9.1 we use the volume Theorem 8.3.2 to complete our charac
terization of invariant valuations on polyconvex sets with one of the most
beautiful and important theorems in geometric probability, Hadwiger's
characterization theorem. We then use Hadwiger's theorem to derive
simple proofs of numerous results in integral geometry and geometric
probability. In Sections 9.3 and 9.4 we give cleaner restatements of the
intrinsic volume formulas of Chapter 6. Sections 9.2, 9.7, and 9.8 deal
with the computation of intrinsic volumes in special cases. In Section 9.6
the mean projection formula of Section 9.4 is combined with the results
of Section 8.5 to yield a generalization of the Buffon needle problem to
spaces and planes of arbitrary finite dimension.
9.1 A proof of Hadwiger's characterization theorem
The following result generalizes Theorem 4.2.5 to the lattice Polycon(n).
As in the case for parallelotopes, this theorem is, in fact, equivalent to
the associated volume Theorem 8.3.2.
Theorem 9.1.1 (Hadwiger's characterization theorem) The val
uations Jto, JtI, ... , Jtn form a basis for the vector space of all convex
continuous rigid motion invariant valuations defined on polyconvex sets
in Rn.
Proof Let Jt be a convexcontinuous invariant valuation on Polycon(n).
Let H be a hyperplane in R n; that is, a linear variety of dimension n 1.
The restriction of Jt to H is an invariant valuation on H. Proceeding by
9.1 A proof of Hadwiger's characterization theorem 119
induction, we may assume that
nl
jt(A) = L Cijti(A),
i=O
for every polyconvex A <:;;; H. Thus, the valuation
nl
jt  L Cijti
i=O
vanishes on all lower dimensional polyconvex sets of R n. This follows
from the invariance of the valuations jti and from the fact that any
lower dimensional polyconvex set is contained in the image of some rigid
motion of the hyperplane H. By the volume Theorem 8.3.2,
nl
jt  L Cijti = Cnjtn,
i=O
where jtn is the volume on Rn, and where C
n
is a real constant. In other
words,
n
jt = L Cijti
i=O
D
A valuation jt on Polycon( n) is said to be homogeneous of degree k > 0
if
for all K E Polycon(n) and all a O.
Corollary 9.1.2 Let jt be a convexcontinuous rigid motion invariant
valuation defined on Polycon(n) that is also homogeneous of degree k,
for some 0 :s: k :s: n. Then there exists C E R such that jt(K) = cjtk(K)
for all K E Polycon( n).
Proof By Theorem 9.1.1 there exist Cl,"" C
n
E R such that
If P = [0, 1]n then, for a > 0,
n
jt = L Cijti
i=O
120 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
Meanwhile,
Therefore, Ci = 0 if i =I k, and /l = Ck/lk.
o
9.2 The intrinsic volumes of the unit ball
As an application of Theorem 9.1.1, we compute the intrinsic volumes
/li(Bn) of the unit ball in Rn. We require the following facts about
Minkowski sums.
Let K, L be compact convex sets, and let a > O. Recall that the
Minkowski sum K + aL is defined by
K + aL = {x + ay : x E K and y E L}.
Proposition 9.2.1 For K E Kn and any unit vector u ERn,
Here u denotes the straight line segment connecting the point u to the
origin o.
Proof Let L = K + EU. The volume /In of L can be computed by
integrating over the hyperplane the length of each linear slice of L;
that is,
where ex denotes the straight line parallel to u through the point x E
Since /ll(L n ex) = /ll(K n ex) + E for all x E while L n ex = 0 if
x we have
11 /ll (L n ex) dx
r /ll(Knex)+Edx
iKlu1
/In(K) +
o
9.2 The intrinsic volumes of the unit ball 121
Let en denote the ndimensional unit cube. Recall from Theorem 4.2.1
that
for ::; i ::; n.
Proposition 9.2.2 For E 0,
Proof Let Ul, U2, ... , Un denote the standard orthonormal basis for Rn.
Let Ui denote the line segment with endpoints at the origin 0 and the
point Ui.
From Proposition 9.2.1 we have
for all n l.
Suppose that the equation (9.1) holds for lower dimensions, and that
for some 1 ::; k < n. Then
Jln(Bn + EUI + ... + EUk+l)
= Jln(Bn + EUI + ... + EUk) + EJlnl(Bn + EUI + ... + EUklut+l)
k (k) .
= L i Wni E' + EJlnl (Bn  l + EUI + ... + EUk)
,=0
= t, G)Wni
Ei
+ t, G)WnliEi+
l
122 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
Since
the equation (9.1) follows by induction to the step k + 1 = n. 0
Theorem 9.2.3 (Steiner's formula) For K E Kn and E 2: 0,
n
Jln(K + EEn) = LJli(K)wn_i
En

i
.
(9.2)
i=O
Proof Let 'fJ(K) = Jln(K + En), for K E Kn. It follows from Proposi
tion 8.2.1 that 'fJ is a continuous invariant valuation. Theorem 9.1.1 then
implies the existence of constants co, ... ,C
n
E R, such that
n
'fJ(K) = L CiJli(K),
i=O
for all K E Kn. Therefore, for E > 0, we have
EnJln + En) = En
n
L CiJli(K)E
n

i
. (9.3)
i=O
Setting K = en and comparing equations (9.1) and (9.3) we find that
o
We are now able to compute the intrinsic volumes Jli(En).
Theorem 9.2.4 (The intrinsic volumes of the unit ball) For 0 S
is n,
Proof Setting K = En in (9.2), we obtain
n
L Jli(En)wn_iEni
i=O
n ( )
n n i
L i WnE  ,
.=0
for all E > O. The proposition then follows from a comparison of the
coefficients of each Eni. 0
9.3 Crofton's formula
9.3 Crofton's formula
123
We are now ready to compute the constants C
k
from Theorem 7.2.1.
Specifically, we have the following remarkable result.
Theorem 9.3.1 For 0:::; k:::; nand K E Kn,
Jlnk(K) = Ak(Graff(K; k)). (9.4)
In other words, C
k
= 1 for all n, k 2: O. We shall see that our judicious
choice of normalization (6.1) for [n] leads in turn to this expression of
the equation (9.4), free from normalizing constant factors. Once again,
note that the equation (9.4) is asserted only for the case in which K is
convex and not for arbitrary polyconvex sets.
Proof Recall from Section 7.2 that
C
k
Ak(Graff(K; k)) = Jlnk(K)
for all compact convex sets K. For the case K = B
n
, we have
CkAk(Graff(Bn;k)) = Jlnk(Bn) = (n: k) = Wnk
Meanwhile,
r r Jlo(Bn n (Vo + p)) dpdvk(Vo)
JGr(n,k) JVl
r r I
Bn
_
k
dpdvk(V
o
)
JGr(n,k) JVl
r Wnk dVk(Vo)
JGr(n,k)
wnkvk(Gr(n, k))
Wnk
Hence, we have
so that C
k
= 1. o
Theorem 9.3.1 enables us in turn to rewrite Hadwiger's formula (7.8):
Jlnk(K) = r Jlo(K n V) dAk(V)' (9.5)
JGraff(n,k)
124 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
Unlike (9.4), the formula (9.5) is valid for all polyconvex sets K, al
though it reduces to (9.4) in the event that K is actually convex. In a
similar vein, we obtain the following relation between intrinsic volumes
of different degree, thereby generalizing Theorem 9.3.1.
Theorem 9.3.2 (Crofton's formula) For 0 :s: i,j :s: nand K E
Polycon( n),
! /1j(K n V) = [i; j] /1i+j(K). (9.6)
Graff( n, ni)
Note that, if j = 0 and K E Kn, then the identity (9.6) reduces to (9.4).
Proof If i + j > n then both sides of (9.6) are zero. Suppose that
i + j :s: n. For K E Kn, define
ry( K) = ! /1j (K n V) (V).
Graff( n, ni)
On applying (9.5) we then obtain
ry(K) =
! !
/10 (K n V n W) j (W) (V),
Graff(n,ni) Graff(V,nij)
where Graff(V, n  i  j) denotes the space of linear varieties W V
having dimension n  i  j. Since each W V, we can rewrite the
previous integral as
r r /1o(K n W)
JGraff(n,ni) JGraff(V,nij)
= [oEGr(n,ni) [l !woEGr(VO,nij) !Wlnvo
/1o(K n (Wo + p + q)) dq dl/;:=:_j (Wo)
= kr(n,ni) kr(VO,nij) [l !Wlnvo
/1o(K n (Wo + p + q)) dqdpdl/;:=Lj(Wo)
= kr(n,ni) kr(VO,nij) [ltB(Wlnvo)
/1o(K n (Wo + v)) dvdv;:=:_j(Wo)
9.4 The mean projection formula revisited 125
= krCn,ni) krcvO,nij) JwoJ..
Jlo(K n (wo + v)) dv
= { { ( IK1wJ..
}GrCn,ni) }Grcvo,nij) }wt 0
= { ( Jli+j(KIWl)
}GrCn,ni) }Grcvo,nij)
since dim(Wl) = i + j. Because Jli+j is a continuous valuation, homo
geneous of degree i + j, the linearity of the integrals above implies that
'f/ is a continuous valuation on Kn, homogeneous of degree i + j. It then
follows from the invariance of Jli+j and of the measures and
that 'f/ is invariant. By Corollary 9.1.2, there exists c E R such that
'f/ = cJli+j' To compute the constant c, set K = En, the unit ball in Rn,
and note that
J J Jli+j (En I wl ) j (Wo) (Vo)
GrCn,ni) GrCvo,nij)
[
n .J [ n i .J Wi+j ,
nz nz]
while
cJli+j (En) = C [i : j J Wi+j,
by Theorem 9.2.4. Hence,
9.4 The mean projection formula revisited
o
The conclusion of Theorem 9.3.1 that C
k
= 1 for all 0 :::; k :::; n also
allows us to restate Theorem 7.4.1, thereby generalizing Cauchy's for
mula 5.5.2.
Theorem 9.4.1 (The mean projection formula) For 0 :::; k < n
and K E Kn,
Jlk(K) = ( Jlk(KlVo) dllk(Vo).
}GrCn,k)
(9.7)
o
126 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
In other words, the kth intrinsic volume /lk(K) of a compact convex
subset K of any dimension in R n is equal to the integral of the kvolumes
of the projections of K onto all kdimensional subspaces of Rn.
Recall that the intrinsic volumes Jtk are normalized; that is, /lk(L) of
an ldimensional convex body L is the same regardless of the dimension
n 2: l of the ambient space R n. The absence of any additional normal
izing factor in (9.7) demonstrates once again the importance of making
the correct choice of normalization for the Grassmannian measures v'k.
The mean projection formula can also be expressed in probabilistic
terms, using random variables. For a compact convex set K in R n let
Xk(K) denote the kvolume of a projection of K onto a randomly chosen
kdimensional subspace V E Gr(n, k). The expectation E(Xk(K)) is
computed by averaging over all projections; that is, by integrating over
all subspaces with respect to the Haar probability measure on Gr(n, k),
to wit,
E(Xk(K)) = r /lk(KIV) dV,
lGr(n,k)
where
r dV = 1.
lGr(n,k)
Integrating instead with respect to the measure v'k, we have
E(Xk(K)) = [n
k
] 1 r /lk(KIV) dv'k.
lGr(n,k)
Thus, we obtain the following version of Theorem 9.4.1.
Corollary 9.4.2 For 0 :s: k :s: nand K E JCn,
D
Hadwiger's Theorem 9.1.1 yields a simple proof of a yet more general
form of Theorem 9.4.1.
Theorem 9.4.3 (Kubota's theorem) For 0 :s: k :s: l :s: nand K E JCn,
9.4 The mean projection formula revisited 127
Proof Define a valuation 'f/ on Kn by
'f/(K) = r /1k(KIV) dvi(V).
lGr(n,l)
Evidently 'f/ is continuous, invariant, and homogeneous of degree k. It
then follows from Corollary 9.1.2 that there exists c E R such that
'f/ = C/1k To compute the constant c we consider the case K = En:
so that
c
[l]! [k]![n  k]! [n]!
[k]![l  k]! [n]! [l]![n l]!
[nk]! [nk]
[n  l]![l  k]!  1  k .
o
Kubota's theorem can also be viewed combinatorially. For 0 :::; k :::; 1
and K E KI, the mean projection formula (9.7) states that
/1k(K) = J /1k(KIW) dvk(W).
Gr(l,k)
Consequently,
J /1k(KIV) dvi(V) = J J /1k((KIV)IW) dvk(W) dvi(V)
Gr(n,l) Gr(n,l) Gr(V,k)
Since each W S;; V, we have (KIV)IW = KIW, so that
J /1k(KIV) dvi(V) = J J /1k(KIW) dVk(W) dvi(v)
Gr(n,l) Gr(n,l) Gr(V,k)
(9.8)
How does this last integral in (9.8) compare with the ordinary mean
projection formula (9.7)? The difference is that in (9.8) we are 'count
ing' a ksubspace W E Gr(n, k) once for each lsubspace V E Gr(n, l)
128 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
containing W. Ideally, our combinatorial intuition would suggest that
counting Zsubspaces that contain W E Gr(n, k) is the same as counting
the (Z k)subspaces of the quotient space RnjW Rnk, of which
there are
[
n k]
Z k .
From this observation it would then follow that
r r !1k(KIW) dVk(W) dvz(V)
JGr(n,l) JGr(V,k)
= [n
z
r !1k(KIW) dvk'(W),
JGr(n,k)
which is precisely what Kubota's theorem 9.4.3 asserts.
9.5 Mean crosssectional volume
A kdimensional crosssection of a compact convex set K is a subset of
the form KnV, where V E Graff(K; k). Let Yk(K) denote the kvolume
of a randomly chosen kdimensional crosssection of K. The mean k
crosssectional volume of K is given by the expectation E(Yk(K)), which
is computed by averaging over all V E Graff(K; k). In other words,
E(Yk(K)) = An(G k)) r !1k(K n V) dAk(V)'
k ra , JGraff(n,k)
By Theorem 9.3.1 we have Ak(Graff(K; k)) = !1nk(K), so that
r !1k(K n V) dAk(V)
JGraff(n,k)
r f !1k(K n (V + x)) dx dvk'(v).
JGr(n,k) Jv.L
Recall from elementary calculus that
r !1k(K n (V + x)) dx = !1n(K),
Jv.L
for each V E Gr(n, k). It follows that
r !1n(K) dvk'(v)
JGr(n,k)
!1n(K)
9.6 The Buffon needle problem revisited 129
The mean kcrosssectional volume of K is then given by
E(Yk(K)) = Mn(K) [n].
Mnk(K) k
A onedimensional crosssection is sometimes called a chord. Recall
that Mnl(K) = (1j2)S(K), where S(K) is the surface area of K. The
expected length of a random chord in K is now given by
E(Yl(K)) = Mn(K) [n] = 2[nl
Mn
(K).
Mnl(K) 1 S(K)
In particular, the expected length of a random chord in the unit nball
B is
9.6 The Buffon needle problem revisited
We are now ready to generalize the Buffon needle problem to ndimen
sional spaces. Suppose that V E Gr( n, k) and that {Vl, ... ,vnd is a
basis for V J... Let V denote the collection
V = {V + alVl + ... + ankVnk : al, ... , ank E Z}
of kplanes in R n. If a compact convex set K is moved randomly in R n ,
what is the expected number of intersections of K with the collection V?
In other words, if we denote by X K the number of connected components
of gK n V for a random Euclidean motion g, what is E(XK)?
Let 12 denote the lattice in V J.. given by
and let C denote a fundamental domain of C. Once again the concept
of random motion is meaningful, since the symmetry of the collection V
allows that we consider only motions involving translations by vectors in
the fundamental domain C. Therefore, the collection of motions under
consideration forms a compact Lie group, on which there exists a unique
Haar probability measure.
Consider the set K + x, where is a rotation and x is a vector. For
a fixed E O( n), the number of intersections of K + x with V is equal
to the number of elements of (K + x) I V J.. n C. Hence, the expected
number of intersections of K + x with V is equal to
Mnk((K + x)IVJ..)
Mnk(C)
Mnk( (K) IV J..)
Mnk(C)
(9.9)
130 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
by Theorem 8.5.2. Therefore, the expected number of intersections of
</>K +x with V over all x and all </> is equal to the expected value of (9.9)
over all orthogonal transformations </>. We now apply Corollary 9.4.2 to
obtain
E(XK) = [ n ] 1 !1nk(K).
n  k !1nk(C)
As an example, consider the case in which K is a needle of length L
in R
2
and V is a collection of lines evenly spaced by a distance d. In
this case is a onedimensional lattice of points on the line V J.., evenly
spaced by a distance d. Since
[
2] 1 = (2) 1 WIW1 =
1 1 W2 7f
it follows that
E(X ) = = 2L
K 7f d 7fd'
which agrees with Buffon's original solution.
9.7 Intrinsic volumes on products
Next we use Hadwiger's characterization Theorem 9.1.1 to examine how
the intrinsic volumes !1i evaluate on orthogonal Cartesian products. We
have the following generalization of Proposition 4.2.3.
Theorem 9.7.1 Let 0 ::; k ::; n, and suppose that K Rk and L
Rnk are polyconvex sets. Then
!1i(K x L) = L !1r(K)!1s(L).
(9.10)
r+s=i
Proof Evidently the set function !1i(K x L) is a continuous valuation in
each of the variables K and L when the other is held fixed. Note that
each motion </> E Ek of Rk is the restriction of a motion <l> E En that
restricts to the identity on the complementary space Rnk. Therefore,
In other words, the set function !1i(K x L) is a continuous invariant
valuation in each variable. By an iteration of Theorem 9.1.1 in each
9.7 Intrinsic volumes on products 131
variable, there exist constants C
rs
E R such that
k nk
Jti(K x L) = L L crsJtr(K)Jts(L)
r=Os=O
for all K E Kk and L E Knk. Let C
m
denote the unit mdimensional
cube. For a, f3 2': 0,
k nk
L L crsJtr(Ck)Jts(Cnk)ar f3s
r=O s=O
Meanwhile,
by Proposition 4.2.3. Therefore, for 0 r k and 0 s n  k, we
have C
rs
= 1 if r + s = i and C
rs
= 0 otherwise. Hence,
k nk
Jti(K x L) = L L crsJtr(K)Jts(L) = L Jtr(K)Jts(L).
r=Os=O r+s=i
D
Corollary 9.7.2 Suppose that Jt is a convexcontinuous invariant valu
ation on Polycon( n) such that
(9.11)
for all K Rk and L Rnk, where 0 k n. Then either Jt = 0 or
there exists C E R such that
(9.12)
Conversely, if Jt is a valuation of the form (9.12) then Jt also satisfies
the multiplicative rule (9.11).
Proof By Hadwiger's Theorem 9.1.1, there exist constants Ci E R such
that
Jt = coJto + clJtl + c2Jt2 + ... + cnJtn
132 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
For k E {O, 1, ... ,n} denote by C
k
the unit kcube in Rk. Then, for all
a, /3 2: 0, the condition (9.11) implies that
k nk
L L crCsJtr(Ck)Jts(Cnk)ar/3s.
r=Os=O
Meanwhile, by Theorem 9.7.1,
n
LCiJti(aCk x /3Cn k)
i=O
n
L Ci L Jtr(Ck)Jts(Cn_k)a
r
/3s
i=O r+s=i
k nk
L L Cr+sJtr (Ck)Jts (Cn_k)a
r
/3s.
r=Os=O
Therefore, cr+s = CrCs for all 0 ::; r, s ::; n. In particular, Co = Co+o = c6,
so that Co = 0 or Co = 1. If Co = 0 then Cr = cr+o = CrCo = 0, so
that Jt = O. If Co = 1 then relabel C = Cl. For r > 0, we then have
C
r
= cHH .. +l = cl = c
r
, from which (9.12) follows. The converse
follows from Theorem 9.7.1 by means of a similar argument. 0
We conclude this chapter with another example of a convexcontinuous
invariant valuation. Choose a realvalued nonnegative continuous func
tion f(t) of a nonnegative variable t, such that f(t) is decreasing suffi
ciently fast to 0 as t + 00.
For any n, and for any nonempty compact convex set K in R n, set
Jt(f; K) = r f(d(p, K)) dp
JRn
where d(p, K) is the distance from the point p to the set K, and where
dp denotes the ordinary ndimensional Lebesgue measure. We show that
Jt satisfies the inclusionexclusion principle; that is,
Jt(f; Kl U ... U Km) = L Jt(f; Ki )  L Jt(f; Ki n Kj ) + . . . (9.13)
i<j
9.7 Intrinsic volumes on products 133
whenever K
1
,K
2
, ... , Km and Kl U UKm are convex. We begin with
a direct proof of the case m = 2.
Let p ERn. Since Kl and K2 are compact, there exist unique points
ql E Kl and q2 E K2 such that d(p, qi) = d(p, Ki). We assume that
Kl U K2 is convex, so that Kl n K2 of 0. Evidently, d(p, Kl U K 2) =
min{d(p,K
1
),d(p,K
2
)}, and d(p,K
1
n K 2) 2: max{d(p,K1 ),d(p,K2)}.
Since Kl U K2 is convex, the line segment I connecting ql and q2 must
intersect Kl nK
2
at some point q'. Either d(p, q') :::; d(p, qd or d(p, q') :::;
d(p, q2). Therefore,
d(p, Kl n K
2
) :::; d(p, q') :::; max{ d(p, K
1
), d(p, K
2
)}
as well, so that d(p, K 1 nK
2
) = max{d(p, K 1 ), d(p, K
2
)}. We then obtain
f(d(p, Kl U K 2)) + f(d(p, Kl n K 2))
= f(min{ d(p, K
1
), d(p, K
2
)}) + f(max{ d(p, Kd, d(p, K 2)})
= f(d(p,Kd) + f(d(p,K2)),
for all p ERn. Hence,
Since f is a continuous function, it follows easily from the definition of
the Hausdorff topology that /l is a continuous function of K. The general
case of (9.13) then follows from Theorems 5.1.1 and 2.2.1. Thus we can
extend /lU; K) to an invariant valuation defined on all polyconvex sets
K. The expression of /lU; K) as a linear combination of the intrinsic
volumes (given by Theorem 9.1.1) exhibits the moments
mjU) = 1= x
j
f(x) dx
of the function f and has the form
n
/lU; K) = f(O)/ln(K) + L Cimil (f)/lni(K),
i=l
where the constants Ci are independent of the function f.
To understand this, and to compute the Ci, consider the case of the
ndimensional ball aB of radius a, centered at the origin. From the
definition, we have
/lU; aB) = ( f(d(p, aB)) dp
JRn
134 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
1B f(O) dp + JRnaB f(lpl  a) dp
f(O)P,n(aB) + 1 1
00
f(r  a)r
n

1
drdu
uESnl '"
f(O)P,n(aB) + nWn 1
00
f(r  a)r
n

1
dr
f(O)P,n(aB) + nwn 1
00
f(y)(y + a)nl dy
f(O)P,n(aB) + nWn I: (n 1) 1
00
f(y)yja
n

1

j
dy
j=O J 0
.
f(O)P,n(aB) + nWn i _ 1 an'mi_l(J)
() ( )
(n  1) nWnmil (J) ()
f 0 P,n aB + i _ 1 P,ni(B) P,ni aB .
Once again Wn denotes the volume of the unit ball B, so that the surface
area of the unit sphere snl is given by nWn It follows that
Ci = (n 1) _n_w::::n::; = (n l)nw
n
( n )l_Wi = iWi,
i1 P,ni(B) i1 ni Wn
so that
n
p,(J; K) = f(O)P,n(K) + 2: iWimil(J)P,ni(K). (9.14)
i=l
A notable special case is obtained by setting f(x) = e7rX
2
The re
sulting valuation is called the Wills functional and is denoted by W(K).
Theorem 9.7.3 If K V and L vJ.. for some linear variety V, then
W(K x L) = W(K)W(L).
Proof The moment mil of f(x) = e
7rX2
is given by
9.8 Computing the intrinsic volumes
On substituting u = 7rX
2
, we have
1 1
00
iI u 1 (i) 1
miI = 27ri/2 0 U 2 e du = 27ri/2 r "2 = iWi
On substituting into (9.14), we have
n n
135
fLU; K) = fLn(K) + L iWimi1 U)fLni(K) = L fLni(K). (9.15)
i=1 i=O
It then follows from Corollary 9.7.2 that W(K x L) = W(K)W(L).
o
From Theorem 9.7.3 we obtain the following characterization for the
Wills functional W. Once again let C
n
denote the unit ncube in Rn.
Corollary 9.1.4 Suppose that fL is a convexcontinuous invariant valu
ation on Polycon( n) such that
fL(K x L) = fL(K)fL(L),
for all K Rk and L Rnk, where 0 :::; k :::; n. If fL(C
I
) = 2 then
fL(K) = W(K) for all K E Polycon(n).
Proof Since fL(Cd i 0, Corollary 9.7.2 implies the existence of some
c E R such that
Hence,
n
fL = fLo + CfLI + C
2
fL2 + ... + CnfLn = L CifLi.
i=O
n
2 = fL(CI ) = L cifLi(Cd = fLo(Cd + CfLI(CI ) = 1 + c,
i=O
so that C = 1. It then follows from (9.15) that fL = W.
9.8 Computing the intrinsic volumes
o
The actual computation of the intrinsic volumes of a polyconvex set is
difficult in general. It is difficult even for (ordinary) volume, and also
for the surface area, which is given by 2fLnl. It can be difficult even in
low dimensions: consider the perimeter of an ellipse, for example.
However, we are already able to compute the intrinsic volumes of
a large class of compact convex sets. Theorem 4.2.1 gives a formula
for the kth intrinsic volume of an orthogonal parallelotope in Rn, and
136 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
Theorem 9.2.4 gives the intrinsic volumes of the unit ball. Theorem 9.7.1
gives a formula for computing the intrinsic volume of an orthogonal
Cartesian product of two polyconvex sets whose intrinsic volumes are
already known.
In this section we work with two additional classes of polyconvex sets.
First, we compute the intrinsic volumes of an arbitrary (possibly non
orthogonal) parallelotope. We then comment on the intrinsic volumes
of an arbitrary convex polytope and give an explicit formula for the first
intrinsic volume f.LI of a convex polytope in R3 in terms of the lengths
of its edges and the angles between the outer normals to its adjacent
facets.
In Section 4.2 we proved Theorem 4.2.4, which characterized volume
on Par(n). Recall that Par(n) denoted the lattice of finite unions of
orthogonal parallelotopes having edges parallel to the coordinate axes
of Rn. A similar theorem holds for more general parallelotopes.
Let VI, ... , Vn be a basis for Rn, and let Par( VI, ... , v
n
) denote the
lattice of finite unions of parallelotopes with edges parallel to the vectors
Vi. The characterization theorem for volume in Par(n), Theorem 4.2.4,
generalizes immediately to the lattice Par ( VI, ... , v
n
).
Theorem 9.8.1 (The volume theorem for Par(VI, ... , v
n
) Let f.L
be a translation invariant simple valuation defined on Par( VI, ... , v
n
),
and suppose that f.L is either continuous or monotone. Then there exists
C E R such that f.L(P) = Cf.Ln(P) for all P E Par(vI, ... , vn); that is, f.L
is equal to the volume, up to a constant factor.
Proof For each i, let Vi denote the line segment having endpoints at Vi
and the origin o. The proof of Theorem 9.S.1 is the same as the proof of
Theorem 4.2.4, provided that we replace the unit cube [0,1]n with the
'unit parallelotope'
C =VI + ... +v
n
of Par(vI, ... , vn). It then follows that f.L = Cf.Ln, where C = f.L(C)/ f.Ln(C),
o
Theorem 9.S.1leads in turn to a formula for the kth intrinsic volume
of an arbitrary parallelotope. Note that if P E Par(vI, ... , v
n
) is a
parallelotope, then P is a translate of a parallelotope of the form
for some al, ... , an ;::: O.
9.8 Computing the intrinsic volumes 137
Theorem 9.8.2 For all 1 :::; k :::; n and all al,"" an 2: 0,
The value of each term /tk (ail ViI + ... + aik Vik) is easily computed
using elementary linear algebra. If A is a k x n matrix whose jth row is
given by the coordinates of the vector aij Vij' for j = 1, ... , k, then
/tk(ai
l
ViI + ... + aik Vik) = Jdet (AAT).
See, for example, [94, p. 234].
Proof of Theorem 9.8.2 Define
and extend Vk to a valuation on all ofPar(vl, ... , v
n
) with Theorem 4.1.3.
Let'TJ = /tkVk. We will prove that 'TJ(P) = 0, for all P E Par(vI, ... , vn ).
Since both /tk and Vk vanish in dimensions less than k, it follows
that 'TJ vanishes in dimensions less than k as well. If we restrict 'TJ to
the kplane Vil, ... ,ik spanned by the (independent) vectors Vip . ,Vik'
then 'TJ becomes a continuous translation invariant simple valuation on
Par(vi
l
, ... , Vik)' It follows from Theorem 9.8.1 (in dimension k) that
there exists c E R such that 'TJ( P) = C/tk (P) for all P E Par( ViI' ... , Vik)'
However,
by the definitions of 'TJ and Vk. Therefore C = 0, and 'TJ vanishes in
dimension k.
In other words, if we restrict 'TJ to a k + Iplane Vil, ... ,ik+l spanned by
the vectors ViI' ... , Vik+l' then we have once again a continuous transla
tion invariant simple valuation, this time on a lattice of parallelotopes
in a space of dimension k + 1. Theorem 9.8.1 again applies, and there
exists C E R such that 'TJ( P) = C/tk+ I (P) for all P E Par( ViI' ... , Vik+J.
However, 'TJ is homogeneous of degree k, whereas /tk+l is homogeneous
of degree k + 1. Hence, we have c = 0, and 'TJ vanishes in dimension
k + 1. Continuing this argument in each higher dimension we conclude
that 'TJ(P) = 0 for P of any dimension in Par(vI, ... , v
n
). 0
138 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
Computing the intrinsic volumes of arbitrary polytopes is more diffi
cult. Recall from Steiner's formula 9.2.3 that, for all r 0,
n
/tn(P + rB) = L /ti(P)wn_irni, (9.16)
i=O
where B denotes the unit ball in R n. Let us consider the convex set
P + r B more carefully. If x E P + r B, then there exists a unique point
Xp E P such that
Ixxpl S; Ixyl,
for all YEP. This follows from the fact that P is compact and convex.
If x E P, then evidently x = x p. If x P, then x p lies on the boundary
OP of P. Moreover, if x P and y E OP, then y = Xp if and only if
x  y.l H, where H is a support plane of P and yEP n H.
Let Pi(r) denote the set of all x E P + rB such that Xp lies in the
relative interior of an iface of P. So, for example, Pn(r) = int(P).
Evidently
n
P+rB= UPi(r), (9.17)
i=O
a disjoint union.
Denote by Fi(P) the set of all idimensional faces of P. For each
proper face Q of P denote by M (Q, r) the set
M(Q,r) = {y+O'v : 0::; 8::; r},
where y E relint( Q) and v is any outward unit normal to oP at the
point y. See Figure 9.l.
It turns out that, for 0 ::; i < n,
Pi(r) = U M(Q, r).
QEFi(P)
To see this, suppose that x E Pi(r). Then Xp E relint(Q) for some iface
Q of P. If x E relint(Q), then x E M(Q, r). If x relint(Q), then
x of Xp. Let v = (x  xp)/Ix  xpl. Then v .1 H for some support
plane H of P at x p, and x = x p + O'v for 0 < 8 = Ix  x pi::; r. In other
words, x E M(Q, r).
Conversely, suppose that x = y + 8v E M ( Q, r) for some iface Q.
If 8 = 0 then x E relint(Q). Otherwise, we have x  y .1 H for some
support plane H at the point y E relint(Q). It follows that y = Xp and
x E Pi(r).
9.8 Computing the intrinsic volumes 139
M({x},r)
Fig. 9.1. The Decomposition of P + rB.
Given a subset A of Rn, the affine hull of A is the intersection of all
planes in Rn (not necessarily through the origin) containing A. Let
denote the set of vectors in Rn orthogonal to the affine hull of A.
If Q is an iface then has dimension n  i, so that ftn(M(Q, r)) =
rniftn(M( Q, 1)) It follows that ftn(Pi(r)) = r
n

i
ftn(P
i
(l)). From (9.17)
we then obtain
n
ftn(P + rB) = Lftn(Pi(l))r
n

i
,
i=O
for all r > O. By comparing (9.16) and (9.18) we find that
fti(P) = ft
n
(P
i
(l)).
Wni
(9.18)
(9.19)
For example, consider a convex polyhedron P in R3 having edges
z'l, ... , ZTn' Each edge Zi is formed by the meeting of two facets Qil
and Qi2 of P, having outward unit normals Uil and Ui2 respectively.
Therefore, the volume of M(Zi' 1) is given by
(
M(. 1)) _ (_.)arccos(uil 'Ui,) _ ftl(Zi)(}i
ft3 Z"  ftl Z, 2  2 '
where (}i is the angle between the outer normals to the facets Qil and
Qi
2
Since W31 = W2 = 7f, it follows that
1 Tn
ftl(P) = '2 Lft1(Zi)(}i.
7f i=l
In other words, the first intrinsic volume of a polyhedron P in R3 is given
140 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
by 1/(21f) multiplied by the sum over all edges of P of the product ofthe
length of each edge and the corresponding angle between the normals to
the facets adjacent to that edge.
Suppose that P is an orthogonal parallelotope in R3 having dimen
sions al x a2 x a3. In this case P has 12 edges, four of length ai for each
i = 1,2,3, while the angles (h are all equal to 1f /2. We then obtain
1 3
/tl(P) = 21f L = al + a2 + a3,
,=1
as asserted by Theorem 4.2.1. Similarly, it is not difficult to show that
if Ts is a regular tetrahedron in R
3
of edge length s, then
formulas for /tl (under a slightly different normalization) evaluated on
a variety of common solids in R3 are described by Hadwiger in [38, pp.
3637J.
9.9 Notes
For the original proof of Hadwiger's characterization Theorem 9.1.1, see
[39J. In addition to providing straightforward verification of many results
in integral geometry, Theorem 9.1.1 also provides a connection between
rigid motion invariant set functions and symmetric polynomials [13J.
The normalization Ak of the invariant measures on Graff(n, k) which
we have used in the text is natural for Roo; it leads to a good definition
of the intrinsic volumes in Hilbert space. The invariant measure under
O(n) in Gr(n, k), corresponding to the measure Ak on Graff(n, k) under
En, is the GaussWiener measure (as can be easily verified).
The article by Schanuel [83J provides an interesting and accessible
perspective on Steiner's formula and the first intrinsic volume, or gener
alized length, /tl, for compact polyhedra in R3. See also [38, pp. 3637J
for extensive computations of /tl in R3.
Steiner's formula (Theorem 9.2.3) is a special case of the polynomial
formula for mixed volumes. For K
l
, K
2
, ... , Km E Kn, and real numbers
AI, A2' ... ' Am > 0, the Minkowski linear combination K = AlKl +
A2K2 + ... + AmKm is the convex body consisting of the set
The basis of the theory of mixed volumes is the polylinearization of
9.9 Notes 141
volume with respect to Minkowski linear combinations. If Kl' ... ' Km E
IC
n
and AI, ... , Am > 0, then the volume /tn is a homogeneous polyno
mial in the positive variables AI, ... , Am; that is,
m
/tn(AlKl + ... + AmKm) = L V(K
i1
, ... , KiJAil ... Ai
n
, (9.20)
where each symmetric coefficient V(Kil' .. . , KiJ depends only on the
bodies K
i1
, ... , Kin.
Given Kl, ... ,Kn E IC
n
, the coefficient V(Kl, ... ,Kn) is called the
mixed volume of the convex bodies Kl' ... ' Kn. It is well known, but
not trivial, that the mixed volume V(Kl' ... ' Kn) is a nonnegative con
tinuous function in n variables on the set IC
n
, symmetric in the variables
K
i
, and monotonic with respect to the subset partial ordering on IC
n
.
Moreover, the mixed volume V(Kl' ... ' Kn) is a valuation in each of
its parameters K
i
, provided that the other parameters are held fixed.
The mixed volumes also satisfy several useful inequalities, such as the
BrunnMinkowski and AleksandrovFenchel inequalities. The intrinsic
volumes /ti studied in the present work are normalizations of the mixed
volume of a convex body K with the unit ball Bn. Specifically,
/ti(K) = _l_V(K, ... , Bn),
Z Wni 'v'
i ni
for all K E IC
n
. For a thorough treatment of the theory of mixed vol
umes, see [85].
Theorem 9.3.2 is originally due to Crofton [14, 15, 16] (see also [85,
p. 235]). Crofton's formula generalizes the ideas of Barbier presented in
Chapter 1. Theorem 9.4.3 was proved by Kubota in [58]; see also [85, p.
295]. Numerous variations of the formulas of Crofton and Kubota can
also be found in [1, 2, 82, 99].
Wills first defined the functional W(K) in the context of lattice point
enumeration [101]. For a discussion of the Wills functional and its ap
plications, see also [85, p. 302] and [96].
There exist many important functionals on IC
n
that are invariant with
respect to rigid motions, but that elude Hadwiger's characterization.
One striking example, pointed out by Hadwiger in [38, p. 44], is the
affine surface area, denoted n. Although originally defined only for
polytopes and smooth convex bodies [85, p. 419], the affine surface area
was later extended to an affine invariant functional on all of IC
n
(see, for
example, [20,59,60,61,66, 89, 100]). Extended affine surface area was
142 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
shown to be a valuation by Schlitt [88]. It turns out, however, that affine
surface area cannot be expressed as a linear combination of intrinsic
volumes, the reason being that it is not continuous, but only upper semi
continuous, on Kn. Instead, the affine surface area satisfies a very strong
invariance property: If K E Kn, then n(K) = n(K), for all affine
transformations ; that is, for all translations and linear transformations
having unit determinant. The affine surface area also satisfies a number
of useful inequalities [67]. The question of how to characterize the affine
surface area as a valuation possessing certain properties (in the style of
Hadwiger's characterization theorem) remains open.
Another interesting open problem of convex set theory is the problem
of classification of invariant set functions that are convexcontinuous
and of polynomial type. For example, a bivaluation J.l(K, L), defined for
polyconvex sets K and L, is a realvalued set function that is a valuation
in either variable, provided that the other variable is held fixed. In a
similar vein one defines a trivaluation and more generally an nvaluation.
If J.l is an nvaluation, set (for K convex)
v(K) = J.l(K, K, ... ,K).
The set function v is called a homogeneous polynomial set function of
degree n. A finite sum of homogeneous polynomial set functions is called
a set function of polynomial type.
It would be interesting to give an 'intrinsic' definition of set functions
of polynomial type. It is tempting to conjecture that the classification
of invariant set functions of polynomial type is related to symmetric
functions. For example, if f(XI,"" xn) is any homogeneous symmetric
polynomial, and if one sets v(P) = f(XI,'" ,x
n
) for any parallelotope
with side lengths Xl, ... , X
n
, one can extend v to all polyconvex sets
by using the expression of f in terms of elementary symmetric functions
and then replacing each occurrence of an elementary symmetric function
by the corresponding intrinsic volume. Does one get all invariant set
functions of polynomial type in this way? (See [13].)
Hadwiger's characterization Theorem 9.1.1 and Theorem 9.3.1 to
gether suggest yet another striking interpretation in the context of sim
plicial complexes. Recall that elements of the distributive lattice L(8)
of Chapter 3 consist of finite unions of simplices, a simplex being a col
lection of subsets of a finite set 8 which is closed under the taking of
subsets; i.e. an order ideal with respect to subset inclusion.
The distributive lattice Polycon(n) admits a partial analogy to this
notion. Loosely speaking, we can think of Polycon(n) as a collection of
9.9 Notes 143
simplicial complexes, such that the simplices are the compact convex sets
in R n, and the faces of such a simplex (a convex set) are its intersections
with lower dimensional planes; i.e. the kfaces of an ndimensional body
K would be the sets K n V for V E Graff(n, n  k). Note, however, the
codimensional duality.
More precisely, define a filter F of a partially ordered set P to be
a subset of P such that if x E F and y 2: x then y E F. In other
words, a filter of P is an order ideal of the dual P* of P (in which
all of the order relations in P are reversed). In dual analogy to order
ideals, the set of minimal elements of a filter F is an antichain in P,
and we can view the filters of P as simplicial complexes, such that a
simplex is now defined to be a filter with a unique minimal element. As
with order ideals, the collection of all filters in P forms a distributive
lattice.
Now consider the case P = Aff(n), ordered by subset inclusion. For
V E Aff( n), denote by V the filter consisting of all linear varieties in
Rn containing V; that is, V = {W E Aff(n) : V W}. One may
view V as a simplex in the distributive lattice of filters in Aff(n). Note
that, although this lattice is also graded from 0 to n, this grading is
dual to that of Aff(n). In other words, the kfaces of V are the (n  k)
dimensional linear varieties in V.
If K E Polycon(n) and VnK =I= 0, then WnK =I= 0 for all W E V.
This motivates us to define k = {V E Aff(n) : V n K =I= 0}. Evidently,
k is a filter in Aff(n). Consequently one may view k as a simplicial
complex in the lattice of filters of Aff( n), and it is then natural to ask
how the lattice Polycon(n) relates to the lattice of filters of Aff(n). (Is
it a quotient lattice?)
Viewed in this light, the intrinsic volumes J.tk become the polyconvex
analogues of the face enumerators (also denoted J.tk) of Section 3.2. This
analogy is buttressed by the formula (9.4), which states that the intrinsic
volume J.tk is, in some sense, an enumerator (measure) of the 'kfaces' of
a 'simplex' (convex set) Kin Polycon(n).
In a similar spirit, one may view the discrete basis Theorem 3.2.4 and
Hadwiger's characterization Theorem 9.1.1 as entirely analogous clas
sifications of invariant valuations on the discrete and polyconvex lat
tices, respectively. The analogy is pressed further by the existence of
Hellytype theorems (Theorem 3.3.1 and Theorem 5.3.3) in both con
texts. Such remarkable similarities suggest the possibility of additional
ties between the simplicial and order structures of these two lattices.
For example, do there exist polyconvex analogues of the binomial coeffi.
144 9 Hadwiger's characterization theorem
cients, and if so, how are these analogues related to the flag coefficients
of Chapter 6?
Similar observations may be made concerning the lattice Mod(n). Al
though the discrete basis Theorem 3.2.4, Theorem 4.2.5 and Hadwiger's
characterization Theorem 9.1.1 characterize all suitably invariant valu
ations on the lattices L(8), Par(n), and Polycon(n) respectively, there
remains the question of how to characterize invariant valuations on sim
plices in Mod(n), as defined in Section 6.4. Indeed the success of the
lattice analogy for Mod(n) in Chapter 6 suggests the possibility of a
comprehensive theory of simplicial complexes in Mod(n) that has yet to
be developed.
The extension of the intrinsic volumes from elementary symmetric
functions on parallelotope edge lengths (see Theorem 4.2.1) to invariant
valuations on compact convex sets motivates the following question re
garding total positivity. Let A be an n x n matrix of real numbers, and
denote by Aij the entry of A in the ith row and jth column. The matrix
A is said to be totally positive if det A ::::: 0 for all minors A of A. See,
for example, [47].
For K E Kn, denote by A(K) the matrix with entries Aij(K) =
J.lji(K) if j  i ::::: 0; otherwise let Aij(K) = O. An interesting open
question is that of whether the matrix A(K) is totally positive. For
example, if we let K denote an orthogonal parallelotope with dimensions
al x ... x an, then the total positivity condition on the 2 x 2 minors
of A(K) is equivalent to Newton's inequality (see [69, p. 106] or [41,
pp. 5155]) for the elementary symmetric functions el, ... , en of the
variables ai:
For general compact convex sets K, it may be necessary to replace the
intrinsic volumes by a renormalization of the J.li in order to obtain total
positivity for the matrix A(K).
Among related open questions, the problem of syzygies seems particu
larly difficult. Let AI,"" Aj be compact convex sets, and let be the
indicator functions of the set Graff( A; k) on Graff( n, k). The problem is
to find a basis for all linear relations
for all k ::::: 0 (so that = fA). Even for k = 0, where = lA, the
problem is not entirely trivial (though it has been solved fully). The
9.9 Notes 145
restricted inclusionexclusion principle for convex sets yields some such
identities, but there are probably some more special identities for each
k.
No doubt there exist additional lattices, for which these questions may
be asked and answered. For example, many results known for the lattice
Polycon(n) (such as Hadwiger's characterization theorem) remain open
questions for the ostensibly simpler lattice pn of polytopes in Rn, as
well as for the lattice of polyconvex subsets of the sphere sn (see also
Chapter 11). For a survey of open questions in this area, see [71, 72].
Another lattice sharing many qualities with Polycon( n) is the lattice
of starshaped sets in R n . A set A R n is said to be starshaped, if
o E A, and if for each line passing through the origin in R n, the set
A n is a closed interval. Advances have recently been made in the
development of a comprehensive, though far from complete, theory of
starshaped sets, a theory dual to the theory of convex sets developed
in the present text. In the dual theory, convex bodies are replaced by
starshaped sets, and projections onto subspaces are replaced by inter
sections with subspaces. In [64] Lutwak introduced dual mixed volumes,
in analogy to the classical mixed volumes of Minkowski (see also [65]).
Dual (starshaped set) analogues also exist for the intrinsic volumes, the
mean projection formula (replaced in the dual theory by a mean in
tersection formula; see [65]), kinematic formulas [103], and Hadwiger's
characterization theorem [51, 52]. A comprehensive introduction to the
theory of starshaped sets and geometric tomography has been presented
in Gardner's book [26].
Finally, one can ask whether an analogous lattice theory is possi
ble for the collection of finite unions of compact convex subsets of the
Grassmannians Gr(n, k), for which the notion of 'convex set' is suitably
defined. Indeed, one may go even further, to the study of polyconvex
subsets of compact Lie groups, about which almost nothing is known at
present. A characterization theorem in the spirit of Hadwiger's charac
terization theorem for invariant valuations on compact Lie groups would
have profound consequences throughout mathematics.
10
Kinematic formulas for polyconvex sets
In this chapter we use Hadwiger's characterization Theorem 9.1.1 to
generalize the kinematic formulas of Chapter 3 to the lattice of polycon
vex sets. These formulas will have application to additional questions
regarding random motions of polyconvex sets. In Section 10.2 we use
the principal kinematic formula of Section 10.1 to give a condition under
which one compact convex set in R2 must be contained in a translate
of another.
10.1 The principal kinematic formula
Before pursuing additional applications of Theorem 9.1.1, we digress
briefly to discuss the Haar measure on the group of Euclidean motions
(including reflections across hyperplanes). It is easy to derive an explicit
formula for such a measure by the arguments we have already employed
for Grassmannians. The Haar measure on the orthogonal group O(n)
is closely related to the invariant measure on the set of frames (and,
therefore, the set of flags of subspaces) in R n, since orthogonal trans
formations are parametrized by Cartesian coordinate systems. In other
words, after fixing a Cartesian coordinate system Xl, X2, ... ,X
n
in R n,
an arbitrary orthogonal transformation is uniquely determined by the
choice of another Cartesian coordinate system UI, U2, ... ,Un with the
same origin. (See also Section 6.7.)
Therefore, an invariant measure on O(n) is obtained from the invariant
measure on the set of frames in Mod( n) after multiplying it by 2n.
However, for the purposes of this section we shall normalize the invariant
measure on O(n) so that the total measure of O(n) equals one; i.e. we
use the Haar probability measure on O(n). Recall that En denotes the
set of all Euclidean motions of R n . Since every Euclidean motion is
10.1 The principal kinematic formula 147
a (possibly improper) rotation followed by a translation, an invariant
measure is induced on En by taking the product of the Haar probability
measure on O(n) with the ndimensional Lebesgue measure. We denote
this Haar measure on En by dg, where 9 E En.
It turns out that Sylvester's Theorem 7.2.3 can be generalized to the
case in which, in place of a linear variety, we substitute any compact
convex set. Let A and K be compact convex sets. For 9 E En, denote
by gK the set {g(b) : b E K}, and consider the integral
/to (A, K) = ( /to (A n gK) dg.
lEn
(10.1)
This integral has an evident geometric interpretation as the measure of
the set of all 9 E En such that AngK =I= 0. Alternatively one may think
of (10.1) as the 'measure' of all convex sets gK in Rn congruent to K
that meet A. If A and C are both compact convex sets of dimension n
and if C ;2 A, then the quotient
f /to (A n gK) dg
f /to(C n gK) dg
(10.2)
gives the probability that a 'rigid' convex set K, dropped at random on
Rn so as to meet C, shall also meet A. Note that this probability is
independent of the choice of normalizing constant for the Haar measure
dg.
The computation of the probability (10.2) can be carried out using
Hadwiger's Theorem 9.1.1. Indeed, the set function /to (A, K) is a con
tinuous valuation in each of its variables K and A when the other is held
fixed. Moreover,
/to(g'A,K) J /to(g'AngK) dg = J /to(Ang'lgK) dg
J /to (A n gK) dg
by the invariance of the Euler characteristic and of Haar measure. One
verifies similarly that /to (A, g' K) = /to (A, K) for all g' E En. Finally,
note that
J /to (A n gK) dg
J /to (gl An K) dg = J /to(gA n K) dg
1
J /to(gA n K) dg,
since the Haar measure on En is invariant under the inversion map 9 1+
148 10 Kinematic formulas for polyconvex sets
gl. Thus, fto(A, K) = fto(K, A). From two applications of Hadwiger's
Theorem 9.1.1 we obtain the expansion
n n
fto(A, K) = L L Cijfti(A)ftj(K),
i=O j=O
where the coefficients Cij = Cji depend only on n, and where fti and ftj
denote the intrinsic volumes.
It turns out that most of the constants Cij are equal to zero. In fact,
they can even be computed explicitly.
Theorem 10.1.1 (The principal kinematic formula) For all A, K E
Polycon( n),
Proof From the argument above we know that
fto(A, K) = 1 fto(A n gK) dg = t Cijfti(A)ftj(K),
En i,j=O
where the Cij are constants depending only on i, j, and n, and where
Cij = Cji'
Let En denote the unit ball in Rn, centered at the origin. For a, b 2: 0,
denote by aEn and bEn the balls of radii a and b in R n, centered at the
origin. Then
1 ftO(aEn n gbEn) dg
En
r r fto(aE
n
n (bEn + V)) dv d
JO(n) JRn
r r fto(aEn n (bEn + v)) dv d,
JO(n) JRn
since En = En for any orthogonal transformation . Since the total
measure of O(n) is equal to one, we continue:
10.1 The principal kinematic formula
iRn I(a+b)Bn dv
(a + b)nwn
Wn t .
=0
149
In other words, J.lO(aBn, bBn) is a homogeneous polynomial in the non
negative variables a and b. Meanwhile,
n
L CijJ.li(aBn)J.lj(bBn)
i,j=O
n
L Cijaibl J.li(Bn)J.lj(Bn).
i,j=O
Therefore, Cij = 0 if i + j =I= n, and
by Theorem 9.2.4.
In view of Theorem 10.1.1, the expression (10.2) becomes
J J.lo(A n gK) dg
J J.lo(C n gK) dg
o
giving once again the probability that a 'rigid' convex set K, dropped
at random on Rn so as to meet C, shall also meet A.
The principal kinematic formula can also be expressed in more prob
abilistic terms, using random variables. For a compact convex set K
in Rn let Xi(K) again denote the ivolume of a projection of K onto
a randomly chosen idimensional subspace V E Gr(n, i). Combining
Corollary 9.4.2 with the principal kinematic formula (Theorem 10.1.1)
we obtain
a formula mysteriously reminiscent of the classical binomial theorem.
150 10 Kinematic formulas for polyconvex sets
10.2 Hadwiger's containment theorem
As an application of the principal kinematic formula 10.1.1, we derive
Hadwiger's condition for the containment of one planar convex region
by another. Theorem 10.1.1 takes the following form for polyconvex
subsets of R2:
for all K, L E K2. The formula (6.4) for flag coefficients then yields
r JLo(K n gL) dg = JLO(K)JL2(L) + + JL2 (K)JLO (L).
J
E2
K
(10.3)
Now suppose that K and L are convex polygons in R2 with nonempty
interiors. Denote by 8K and 8L the boundaries of K and L respectively,
and let 9 be a Euclidean motion of the plane. If K n gL = 0 then
8Kng8L = 0 as well. However, if KngL I 0 there are two possibilities.
The first possibility is that 8K n g8L I 0 as well, in which case
8K n g8L consists of an even number of distinct points in R2. (There
is a possibility that 8K and g8L will intersect in some other way, but
the set of such motions 9 is easily seen to be of measure zero in E2.)
The second possibility is that 8K n g8L is still empty, which implies
that either K S;;; int gL or gL S;;; int K. In other words, the motion 9
moves one of the regions K or L into the interior of the other.
Suppose that neither K nor L can be moved into the interior of the
other by any rigid motion of the plane. This eliminates the second
possibility. In terms of the Euler characteristic, this noncontainment
assumption implies that
(i) If JLo(K n gL) = 0 then JLo(8K n 9 8L) = 0 as well, and
(ii) If JLo(K n gL) = 1 then JLo(8K n g8L) = 2k for some positive
integer k,
for all 9 E E2 (except a set of measure zero). In other words, if neither
K nor L can be moved into the interior of the other by any rigid motion
of the plane, then we have
JLo(8K n 9 8L) ?: 2JLo(K n gL).
10.2 Hadwiger's containment theorem
It follows that
( /to(8K n g8L) dg ( 2/to(K n gL) dg.
iE2 iE2
The principal kinematic formula (10.3) for R2 then implies that
2
/to (8K)/t2(8L) + /tl (8K)/tl (8L) + /t2(8K)/to(8L)
1f
151
4
> 2/to(K)/t2(L) + /tl (K)/tl (L) + 2/t2(K)/to(L).
1f
Because K and L are convex, we have /to(K) = /to(L) = 1. Since K
and L are polygons, 8K and 8L consist of finite unions of line segments.
Therefore, /t2(8K) = /t2(8L) = 0, and we have
2 4
/tl(8K)/tl(8L) 2/t2(L) + /tl (K)/tl (L) + 2/t2(K). (10.4)
1f 1f
If we denote by A(K) and P(K) the area and perimeter of a compact
convex subset K of R2 (with a nonempty interior), the inequality (10.4)
becomes
2A(L) + + 2A(K),
so that
21f(A(K) + A(L))  P(K)P(L) :S o. (10.5)
Given K, L E K2 with nonempty interiors, define fl(K, L) by
fl(K, L) = 21f(A(K) + A(L))  P(K)P(L). (10.6)
We have shown that, if K and L are convex polygons with nonempty
interiors, and if neither K nor L can be moved into the interior of the
other by any rigid motion of the plane, then fl(K,L) :S O. Since the set
of convex polygons is dense in the set of all compact convex subsets of
R2, a simple continuity argument implies that fl(K, L) :S 0 if K, L E K2
(not necessarily polygons) such that neither contains a translate of the
other in its interior. Thus, we have the following theorem.
Theorem 10.2.1 (Hadwiger's containment theorem) Let K, L E
K2 with nonempty interiors. If fl(K, L) > 0 then there exists a Eu
clidean motion g E E2 such that either K int gL or L int gK.
o
Which way will the containment go? If fl(K, L) > 0 then Theorem 10.2.1
implies that A(K) =I= A(L). Therefore, the convex body of larger area
will contain a rigid motion of the other.
152 10 Kinematic formulas for polyconvex sets
10.3 Higher kinematic formulas
In addition to the principal kinematic formula 10.1.1 one can derive anal
ogous kinematic formulas for the remaining intrinsic volumes JL1, ... , JLn.
Define a function (k on pairs of polyconvex sets by the formula
(k(A, K) = r JLk(A n gK) dg
JEn
For convex A and K, one may interpret the expression
fEn JLk(A n gK) dg
fEn JLo(A n gK) dg
as the mean value, or the expected value, of the kth intrinsic volume of
An gK, taken over all gK in Rn congruent to K that meet A. If A
and C are compact convex sets of dimension n and if C ;2 A, then the
quotient
f JLk(A n gK)dg
f JLo(C n gK)dg
gives the expected value of JLk(A n gK) given that K meets C.
For A, K convex, Theorem 9.3.1 asserts that
JLk(A n gK) = n gK; n  k))
Therefore, we have
(k(A,K) = hn JLk(AngK) dg
1 n gK; n  k)) dg
En
r r
J En JGraff(n,nk)
r r JLoA n V) n gK)
JGraff(n,nk) J En
(10.7)
r t 1 JLi(A n V)JLni(K)
JGraff(n,nk) i=O 2
[7] 1 JLni(K) r JLi(A n V)
i=O JGraff(n,nk)
nk [i + k] [n]l
k i JLni (K)JLHk (A),
10.4 Notes 153
where the last equality follows from Theorem 9.3.2. Hence, we have the
following generalization of Theorem 10.1.1 for the intrinsic volumes.
Theorem 10.3.1 (The general kinematic formula) For 0::; k ::; n,
r nk [. + k] [ ]1
lEn Jtk(A n gK) dg = 't k Jtk+i(A)Jtni(K).
for all A, K E Polycon( n).
o
Theorem 10.3.1 and Hadwiger's characterization Theorem 9.1.1 to
gether provide a kinematic formula for the integral
r Jt(A n gK) dg,
lEn
for any continuous invariant valuation Jt on Polycon(n).
10.4 Notes
The principal kinematic formula 10.1.1 has variously been attributed
to Blaschke, Chern, Hadwiger, and Santal6 (see [82, p. 262] and [85,
p. 253]). In [46], Howard gave a generalization of the kinematic for
mula to Riemannian homogeneous spaces. By a different approach Fu
proved a generalized principal kinematic formula for invariant differen
tial forms on homogeneous spaces [25]. Zhang [103] recently developed
dual kinematic formulas for the lattice of starshaped sets in Rn. For
numerous variations and applications of kinematic formulas, see also
[82, 85, 87, 98, 106].
Hadwiger's containment Theorem 10.2.1 first appeared in [35, 36]; see
also [82, pp. 121123]. A spherical version of Hadwiger's containment
theorem is treated in Section 11.4; see also [82, p. 324]. The question
of how to generalize Theorem 10.2.1 to higher dimensions remains open
in many cases; some new ideas have recently been put forward by Zhou
[77, 104, 105, 106, 107] for convex bodies in R3 and in R2n, and by
Zhang [102] for Rn in general. For a generalization of Theorem 10.2.1
to the projective and hyperbolic planes, see [31].
Once again we emphasize the analogical nature of these results. In par
ticular, the kinematic formula 3.2.5 of Chapter 3 is a discrete analogue
of the general kinematic formula 10.3.1 for Polycon(n). This analogy
suggests the possibility of additional kinematic formulas for the lattice
Mod(n), with applications to appropriate probabilistic questions in this
context.
11
Polyconvex sets in the sphere
The successful characterization of many classes of valuations on poly
topes and compact convex sets in Euclidean space motivates similar
questions about valuations on polytopes and convex sets in nonEuclid
ean spaces. Unfortunately little is yet known about valuations in a
nonEuclidean context. In this chapter we consider valuations on the
lattice of polyconvex sets in the unit sphere sn, with emphasis on the
elementary example of continuous O(3)invariant valuations on the unit
sphere S2 in R3.
11.1 Convexity in the sphere
Recall that sn denotes the set of unit vectors in Rn+l. The intersection
En sn of a twodimensional subspace E of Rn+l with the sphere is
called a great circle. More generally, the set E n sn is called a great
ksubsphere of sn if E is a subspace of Rn+l of dimension k + 1. Two
points x, y, E snl are said to be antipodal if y = x.
The sphere sn inherits a Riemannian structure from the ambient
space R n+
1
, in which the shortest path (or geodesic) between two non
antipodal points x I= y E sn is given by the shorter arc of the unique
great circle in sn passing through x and y. A great (n l)subsphere (J
separates sn into two hemispheres, each the antipode of the other. The
intersection of n + 1 distinct hemispheres having linearly independent
normals is called a spherical nsimplex. The intersection of at most n
hemispheres is called a lune.
For u E sn denote by uL the ndimensional subspace of Rn+l orthog
onal to u. If is a simplex inside the great (n  1 )subsphere uL n sn,
the lune through denoted L( consists of the union of all half circles
with endpoints at u and u and bisected by a point of
11.1 Convexity in the sphere 155
A set P sn is a convex spherical polytope if P can be expressed
as a finite intersection of hemispheres. Denote by p(sn) the set of all
convex spherical polytopes in sn. A spherical polytope is a finite union
of convex spherical polytopes.
More generally, a set K sn will be called convex if K is contained
in some hemisphere of sn and if any two points of K can be connected
by a geodesic (i.e. an arc of a great circle) inside K. Alternatively, a set
K lying inside a hemisphere of sn is convex if the cone 0 * K in R n+1
defined by
0* K = {Au : u E K and ::; ). ::; 1}
is convex in R n+
1
.
Denote by K(sn) the set of all compact convex sets in sn. The set
K(sn) is endowed with the topology induced by the Hausdorff metric on
compact sets in Rn+l (see Section 4.1). In analogy to the Euclidean case,
we call a set K sn poly convex if K can be expressed as a finite union
of compact convex sets in sn. Evidently the collection of polyconvex
sets in sn forms a distributive lattice under union and intersection of
sets.
A function cp : p(sn) t R is called a valuation on p(sn) if cp(0) = 0,
where 0 is the empty set, and if
cp(P U Q) = cp(P) + cp(Q)  cp(P n Q), (11.1)
for all P,Q E p(sn) such that PUQ E p(sn) as well. A valuation cp on
p(sn) is simple if it vanishes on spherical polytopes of dimension less
than n. A valuation cp on p(sn) will be called invariant if cp(gP) = cp(P)
for all orthogonal transformations (rotations and reflections) g of sn.
Similarly, a function cp : K(sn) t R is said to be a valuation if
cp(0) = and if (11.1) is satisfied for all compact convex sets K, L sn
such that K U L E K(sn) as well. The following is an adaptation of
Groemer's extension Theorem 5.1.1 for valuations on the sphere sn.
Theorem 11.1.1 (Groemer's extension theorem for sn)
(i) A valuation cp defined on convex polytopes in sn admits a unique
extension to a valuation on the lattice of all polytopes in sn.
(ii) A continuous valuation cp on compact convex sets in sn admits a
unique extension to a valuation on the lattice of polyconvex sets
in sn.
In each case the extension of cp to finite unions is given by iteration of
the inclusionexclusion identity (11.1). 0
156 11 Polyconvex sets in the sphere
The proof of part (i) of Theorem 11.1.1 follows the same lines as the
proof of Theorem 4.1.3. Similarly, the proof of Theorem 5.1.1 (for the
Euclidean case) goes through for the sphere sn without essential change,
since the original proof is based not on the geometry of Rn, but rather
on the algebra of indicator functions, and on the fact that a polytope
is the intersection of half spaces in R n, a property which carries over
analogously to spherical polytopes and hemispheres. (See Section 5.1.)
In the arguments that follow, the unique extension of a valuation 'P given
by Theorem 11.1.1 will allow us to consider the value of'P on all finite
unions of convex spherical polytopes (or compact spherical convex sets
in sn), whether or not such unions are actually convex.
11.2 A characterization for spherical area
We now turn our attention to the twodimensional sphere S2. Impor
tant examples of continuous invariant valuations on P(S2) (and K(S2))
include spherical area, denoted 'P2, spherical length 'PI, and the Euler
characteristic 'Po.
The spherical length 'PI (K) of a spherical convex region K with a
nonempty interior in S2 is given by one half of the perimeter of K; that
is, one half of the length of the curve in S2 that forms the boundary of
K. It is easy to verify that 'PI is an extension of geodesic length in S2
to a continuous invariant valuation on K(S2). To see this, note that
for all K E K(S2).
The Euler characteristic 'Po (K) of a spherical convex region K is de
fined to be 1 if K i= 0, while 'Po(0) = o. Theorem 11.1.1 insures that 'Po
has a unique continuous and invariant extension to all finite unions of
spherical convex sets in K. As in the Euclidean case, this unique exten
sion of 'Po coincides with the Euler characteristic of algebraic topology.
It can be shown that in fact every continuous invariant valuation on
p(S2) (or K(S2)) is a linear combination of the valuations 'PO,'PI,'P2.
To this end, we prove a characterization theorem for spherical area 'P2.
Theorem 11.2.1 (The spherical area theorem) Suppose that 'P is
a continuous invariant simple valuation on p(S2). Then there exists
c E R such that 'P(P) = C'P2(P), for all P E P(S2).
Remark: Theorem 11.2.1 actually holds under the weaker assumption
11.2 A characterization for spherical area 157
that cp is invariant under the group SO(3) of rotations of S2. This follows
from an argument similar to that in the proof of Proposition 8.3.1.
Before proving Theorem 11.2.1, we consider two preliminary cases.
Proposition 11.2.2 Suppose that cp is a continuous invariant simple
valuation on closed arcs I of the circle SI. Then there exists c E R such
that cp(I) = CCPl (I), for all closed arcs I SI.
Proof Let c = cp(SI) / (27r), and define 1/(1) = cp(I)  CCPl (I), for all closed
arcs I SI. Note that 1/ is also continuous, invariant, and simple. In
addition, I/(SI) = o. It now suffices to show that 1/(1) = 0 for all I.
Suppose that In is a closed arc of length 27r / n, where n is a positive
integer. Since the circle SI can be tiled with n rotations of In, the
invariance and simplicity of 1/ imply that nl/(In) = I/(SI) = 0, so that
I/(In) = O. Since any closed arc I of length 27rm/n can be tiled with
rotations of In, for any positive integers m < n, it follows that 1/ vanishes
on arcs of length rational in proportion to the circle. It then follows from
the continuity of 1/ that 1/(1) = 0 for all closed arcs I. 0
Proposition 11.2.3 Suppose that cp is a continuous invariant simple
valuation on p(S2) such that cp(S2) = O. Then = 0, for all spher
ical simplices C S2.
Proof Let 0" denote a great circle in S2. For any closed arc I contained
in a halfcircle in 0", denote by (1) the lune through I, and define
1/(1) = cp((I)). Evidently the valuation 1/ satisfies the conditions of
Proposition 11.2.2. Therefore, there exists c E R such that 1/(1) =
ccpl(I) for all I 0". However, 1/(0") = cp(S2) = 0, so that c = O. It
follows that cp vanishes on alllunes through closed arcs of 0". Since cp is
invariant, it follows in turn that cp vanishes on alllunes in S2.
Now suppose that is a spherical 2simplex in S2; that is, a spherical
triangle; given by the intersection of hemispheres = HI nH
2
nH
3
. See
Figure 11.1. For A S2 denote by AC the closure of the complement
S2  A. Note that
where  denotes the orthogonal reflection of through the origin in
R3. Since cp is simple and invariant, we obtain
cp(Hl U H2 U H
3
) = cp(S2)  CP((HI UH
2
U H
3
n = 0  cp( =
(11.2)
158 11 Polyconvex sets in the sphere
Fig. 11.1. An intersection of hemispheres in 8
2
Meanwhile, iteration of the inclusionexclusion identity (11.1) gives
3
cp(Hl UH2UH3) = L cp(Hi)  L cp(HinHj)+cp(HlnH2nH3). (11.3)
i=l i<j
Note that the intersections Hi n Hj are lunes in 8
2
for i =1= j. Since cp
vanishes on hemispheres and lunes, the identity (11.3) implies that
(11.4)
It then follows from (11.2) and (11.4) that = that is,
= O. 0
Remark: A spherical triangle in 8
2
has angle measures ct, /3, 'Y E [0,11']
if the inner Euclidean (dihedral) angles between planar sides of the cone
o * in R3 are given by ct, /3, 'Y. It is well known that the spherical area
of is given by the spherical excess:
(11.5)
One can prove (11.5) by the same inclusionexclusion technique that
was used in the proof of Proposition 11.2.3, using the fact that the lune
through a great circular arc of length 8 has spherical area 28. We are
now ready to prove Theorem 11.2.1.
Proof of Theorem 11.2.1 Suppose that cp is a continuous invariant simple
valuation on P(8
2
). Let c = cp(8
2
)j(411') and define v(P) = cp(p) 
Ccp2(P) for all P E P(8
2
). Since the valuation v satisfies the conditions
of Proposition 11.2.3, it follows that = 0 for all spherical simplices
<;;; 8
2
.
For P E P(8
2
) express P as a union of spherical simplices
P= U
11.3 Invariant valuations on spherical polytopes 159
where n < 2 for all i =1= j. Since v is simple, it follows that
m
v(P) = L = 0,
i=1
for all P E p(S2). o
Since any continuous invariant simple valuation <P on K(S2) restricts
to such a valuation on the dense subspace p(S2) of convex spherical
polytopes, Theorem 11.2.1 and the continuity of <P immediately imply
the following theorem.
Theorem 11.2.4 Suppose that <P is a continuous invariant simple val
uation on K(S2). Then there exists c E R such that <p(K) = c<P2(K),
for all K E K(S2). 0
11.3 Invariant valuations on spherical polytopes
Theorem 11.2.1 leads to the following characterization theorem for con
tinuous invariant valuations.
Theorem 11.3.1 Suppose that <p is a continuous invariant valuation on
p(S2). Then there exist Co, Cl, C2 E R such that, for all P E p(S2),
Theorem 11.3.1 can be thought of as a spherical analogue of Had
wiger's characterization Theorem 9.1.1. Since the set p(S2) is dense in
K(S2), Theorem 11.3.1 also holds if p(S2) is replaced with the larger
collection K(S2).
Proof Suppose that <p is a continuous invariant valuation on p(S2). Let
x E S2, and let Co = <p({x}). Since <p is invariant, the value of Co
is independent of the choice of x. Therefore, the valuation <p  co<po
vanishes on singleton sets in S2.
If we restrict <p  co<po to a great circle a C S2, then by Proposi
tion 11.2.2 there exists CI E R such that <p  Co<po = CI<PI on P(a).
Once again it follows from the invariance of <p, <Po, and <PI that the real
number CI is a constant independent of our choice of the great circle a.
It follows that the valuation v on P(S2) given by
160 11 Polyconvex sets in the sphere
vanishes on all P E P(S2) of dimension less than 2; that is, v is a
continuous invariant simple valuation on p(S2). Theorem 11.2.1 then
implies the existence of C2 E R such that v(P) = C2!.p2(P) for all P E
p(S2). 0
Theorem 11.3.1 implies that any continuous invariant valuation on
p(S2) is determined completely by its values on a singleton {x}, a great
circle 0", and the entire sphere S2. Indeed, the coefficients Ci in Theo
rem 11.3.1 can be computed using the following table of values:
{x} 0" S2
!.po 1 0 2
!.pI 0 21f 0
(11.6)
!.p2 0 0 41f
Note well that !.pI (S2) = O. This follows from the fact that !.pI (H) = 1f,
for any closed hemisphere H, while !.p1(0") = 21f if 0" is a great circle.
Denote by H the antipode of H. We then obtain
since H n His a great circle.
One of the advantages of Hadwiger's characterization Theorem 9.1.1
for invariant valuations on Euclidean convex sets is the ease with which
that theorem allows one to prove a variety of classical results in integral
geometry. We now demonstrate similar advantages of the spherical area
Theorem 11.2.1 and the resultant characterization Theorem 11.3.1.
We begin with a spherical analogue of the mean projection formula
(9.7) of Section 9.4. For K E K(S2) and u E S2, define the projection
Ku of K onto the great circle u.l n S2 by
Ku = {x E u.l n S2 : lux] n K :f. 0},
where lux] denotes the (unique) half great circle through x with end
points at u and u.
The mean spherical width sw(K) of a compact convex set Kin S2 is
defined by
(11. 7)
The functional sw(K) is continuous on K(S2). To see this, note that, for
a fixed u E S2 and K E K(S2), the interval Ku varies continuously in a
neighborhood of (K, u) provided that either u E int(K) or u 1:. K. Thus
the functional !.pI (Ku) is continuous at (K, u) unless u E oK. Since oK
11.3 Invariant valuations on spherical polytopes 161
has measure zero in S2, the functional ifJl (Ku) is integrable with respect
to spherical Lebesgue measure, and the integral (11. 7) varies continu
ously with respect to K. Although we do not apply the formula (11.7) to
nonconvex sets, it is possible to extend the functional sw to a continuous
valuation on all polyconvex sets in S2 as follows.
Suppose that K c S2 is compact and convex. If u E S2 and x E
uL n then ifJo(Kn lux]) = 1 if and only if x E K
u
, otherwise ifJo(Kn
lux]) = 0. (An exception may occur if K contains a great halfcircle, in
which case this exception will occur with measure zero.) Therefore, the
equation (11.7) can be rewritten
sw(K) = r ifJl(Ku ) du = r 1, ifJo(K n lux]) dx duo (11.8)
iS2 iS2 uLn S2
Since ifJo is an invariant valuation, it follows from (11.8) that the mean
spherical width sw(K) is a continuous invariant valuation of K. More
over, the integral (11.8) is defined for all polyconvex sets in S2, giving
the desired extension of sw.
Proposition 11.3.2 For K E K(S2),
sw(K) = 41rifJl(K) + 21rifJ2(K).
Proof Since sw is a continuous invariant valuation on K(S2), Theo
rem 11.3.1 implies that
for some constants Ci E R. Since the formula (11.8) is valid (as a valua
tion) for all finite unions of compact convex sets, we can evaluate (11.8)
to compute sw on great circles and on the full sphere S2. To compute the
coefficients Ci, note that sw vanishes on singleton sets, so that Co = 0. If
0" is a great circle, then 0" n lux] consists of a single point almost always;
that is, provided that u rf 0". Thus, ifJo(O" n lux]) = 1 almost always, and
we obtain
Cl ifJl (0") = 21rCl = r 1, dx du = 81r
2
,
iS2 uLnS2
or Cl = 41r. Finally, if K = S2 then S2 n lux] = lux]' a halfcircle, so
that ifJO(S2 n lux]) = 1. Since ifJl(S2) = 0, we obtain
C2ifJ2(S2) = 41rC2 = r 1, dx du = 81r
2
,
iS2 uLn S2
or C2 = 21r.
D
162 11 Polyconvex sets in the sphere
In a similar manner Theorem 11.3.1 can be used to obtain an easy
proof of the spherical Crofton formula, which expresses the spherical
perimeter (or length) of a spherical polyconvex set K as the measure of
the great circles meeting K; that is,
r 4?o(K nul..) du = 44?1(K),
JS2
for all polyconvex sets K in S2.
11.4 Spherical kinematic formulas
(11.9)
In analogy to the methods of Sections 10.1 and 10.3, the characteriza
tion Theorem 11.3.1 yields an easy proof of a spherical kinematic formula
for polyconvex sets in S2, which generalizes the spherical Crofton for
mula (11.9).
Theorem 11.4.1 (The principal kinematic formula for S2) For
all poly convex sets K, L S2,
1
4?o(K n gL) dg =
0(3)
1 1
41f 4?0 (K)4?2 (L) + 21f24?1(K)4?1(L)
1 1
+ 41f4?2(K)4?0(L)  81f
2
4?2(K)4?2(L).
Here the integral is taken with respect to the invariant Haar probability
measure on the orthogonal group 0(3).
Proof To begin, define
4?o(K, L) = 1 4?o(K n gL) dg.
0(3)
For fixed K, the set function 4?o(K, L) is a valuation in the variable L;
in fact, it is an invariant valuation, since
4?o(K,goL)
1
4?o(K n ggoL) dg
0(3)
1
4?o(K n gL) dg,
0(3)
for each go E 0(3). By Theorem 11.3.1, the functional 4?o(K, L) can be
expressed as a linear combination of the valuations 4?i' with coefficients
11.4 Spherical kinematic formulas
ci(K) depending on K:
2
'Po(K, L) = I>i(K)'Pi(L).
i=O
163
Meanwhile, for fixed L, the set function 'Po(K, L) is a valuation in the
variable K. From this it follows that each of the coefficients ci(K) is
a valuation in the variable K. One way to check this fact is to insert
special values for L and use the table (11.6). Since 'Po is invariant, we
'Po(K, L) r 'Po(K n gL) dg
JO(3)
r 'PO(g1 K n L) dg
JO(3)
r 'Po(gK n L) dg = 'Po(L, K).
JO(3)
Therefore, the coefficients ci(K) are invariant valuations in the param
eter K, so that
2
'Po(K, L) = L Cij'Pi(K)'Pj(L),
i,j=O
(11.10)
again by Theorem 11.3.1. Since 'Po(K,L) = 'Po(L,K), it is evident that
Cij = Cji' One can verify this, as well as compute the values of the
coefficients Cij, by evaluating 'Po(K, L) for the cases in which each of K
and L is either a point (singleton) {x}, a great circle 0", or the whole
sphere 8
2
, using the values of 'Pi given in the table (11.6).
For example, if K = L = {x}, then (11.10) takes the form:
0= Coo.
We then let K = 0" and L = {x}, so that (11.10) becomes
o COl 'Po (0" )'PI ( {x}) + ClO'PI (0" ) 'Po ( {x}) + Cll 'PI (0" )'PI ({ X } )
0+ 27rClO + 0
so that ClO = COl = O.
In a similar manner one evaluates both sides of (11.10) for each case
of K, L E {{x}, 0", 8
2
} (using the table (11.6)) to compute the values of
Cij, thereby completing the proof of Theorem 11.4.1. 0
164 11 Polyconvex sets in the sphere
Using similar methods one can easily show that, for polyconvex sets
K,L<:::; S2,
and
r ifJ2(K n gL) dg = 4
1
ifJ2(K)ifJ2(L),
JO(3) n
thereby classifying all kinematic formulas for continuous invariant valu
ations on S2 (by Theorem 11.3.1).
Theorem 11.4.1 and its higher dimensional generalizations have nu
merous applications to questions in spherical geometric probability. For
example, Theorem 11.4.1 (as stated for S2) leads in turn to a spherical
analogue of Hadwiger's containment Theorem 10.2.1.
Theorem 11.4.2 Let K, L E K(S2) with nonempty interiors, and sup
pose that
(11.11)
Then there exists 9 E 0(3) such that either K <:::; int gL or L <:::; int gK.
D
To determine the direction of containment in Theorem 11.4.2, one com
pares the values of ifJ2(K) and ifJ2(L). Evidently the set of larger spher
ical area will contain a rigid motion of the other.
If we define A(K) = ifJ2(K) and P(K) = 2ifJl(K) (spherical area and
perimeter respectively), then the inequality condition (11.11) becomes:
2n(A(K) + A(L))  A(K)A(L)  P(K)P(L) > O.
Compare this with (10.5) in Section 10.2.
In analogy to the proof of Theorem 10.2.1, the proof of Theorem 11.4.2
makes use ofthe spherical principal kinematic formula (Theorem 11.4.1),
along with the fact that two polygonal convex curves in the sphere will
almost always intersect at an even number of points. For details, see
Section 10.2.
11.5 Remarks on higher dimensional spheres
A natural question at this point (or even earlier) is that of how spherical
volume on polytopes or convex sets in higher dimensional spheres is
11.5 Remarks on higher dimensional spheres 165
to be characterized. In order to characterize spherical area (on S2)
we proved the following sequence of assertions for a given continuous
invariant simple valuation cp:
cp is simple tt cp = area on lunes (by induction on dimension)
tt cp = spherical area,
where the second implication follows from an inclusionexclusion argu
ment (see (11.3)). Unfortunately, this inclusionexclusion argument fails
in S3 and for s2n+1 in general. Without a characterization theorem for
spherical volume in S3, the induction step for the first implication is not
possible, so that the proof of Theorem 11.2.1 also fails to generalize to
S4 and so on. However, we do have the following partial result.
Denote by S the (invariant) spherical volume on s2n. Recall that a
lune in s2n is a subset of s2n consisting of the intersection of at most
2n hemispheres.
Theorem 11.5.1 Suppose that cp is a continuous invariant simple val
uation on p(S2n). Ifcp(L) = S(L) for alllunes L S2n, then cp(P) =
S(P) for all P E p(S2n).
Proof Without loss of generality we may assume that cp(S2n) = 0, so
that cp(L) = 0 for alllunes L s2n. (Just substitute cp  S for cp.) It
remains to show that cp(P) = 0 for all P E p(S2n).
Suppose that b. is a spherical simplex in s2n given by the intersection
of hemispheres b. = HI n ... n H
2n
+
l
. Again denote by AC the closure
of the complement S2n  A, for any A s2n. Note that
Since cp is simple and invariant, we obtain
= 0  cp( b.) = cp(b.).
(11.12)
Meanwhile, the inclusionexclusion principle gives
(
2n+1 )
cp U Hi
i=1
2n+1
L CP(Hi)  L CP(Hil n H
i2
) + ...
(11.13)
166 11 Polyconvex sets in the sphere
Since cp vanishes on hemispheres and lunes, all of the terms on the right
hand side of (11.13) vanish except for the last term: (1)2ncp(Hl n .. n
H
2nH
) = It then follows from (11.12) that
(
2n+l )
= cp ild Hi =
so that = O. Since every polytope P E p(S2n) can be expressed
as a union of spherical simplices intersecting in dimension less that 2n,
it follows that cp(P) = 0 for all P E p(S2n). 0
This proof of Theorem 11.5.1 fails for s2nH because the sign of the
last term on the righthand side of (11.13) is negative in this case, so
that, on combining it with (11.12), we would obtain the tautological
observation that
(
2n+l )
= cp ild Hi =
For this reason a proof of such a spherical volume characterization for
S2nH, if possible, will require some new ingredient besides the decompo
sition of simplices by inclusionxclusion. Indeed the question of whether
spherical volume is the only continuous invariant simple valuation on
p(sn) (or K(sn)) remains open for dimension n 2: 3.
11.6 Notes
Theorems 11.2.1 and 11.5.1 are both originally due to McMullen. In [70]
McMullen developed the polytope algebra, which places many dissection
and inclusionexclusion techniques in an algebraic framework (see also
[72]). The proofs of Theorems 11.2.1 and 11.5.1 given in Section 11.2
give a more simplified approach to these specific questions.
Groemer made observations regarding Theorem 11.1.1 at the end of
his paper on extensions of additive set functionals [32]. Theorem 11.4.2
and other nonEuclidean analogues of Hadwiger's containment theorem
can be found in [82, p. 324]. For additional references see Section 10.4.
Theorem 11.4.1 generalizes to a principal kinematic formula for spheres
of arbitrary dimension; see [82, p. 321]. Similarly, the spherical Crofton
formula (11.9) generalizes to higher dimensions [82, p. 316]. However,
it is not known whether the characterization Theorem 11.3.1 generalizes
to spheres of dimension n 2: 3.
11.6 Notes 167
Theorems 11.2.1 and 11.2.4 vastly simplify valuation characterization
theorems for valuations on starshaped sets in R3. In [51, 52] charac
terizations are given for continuous homogeneous valuations and contin
uous rotation invariant valuations on a class of starshaped sets called
Lnstars; that is, starshaped sets in R
n
with nintegrable radial nmc
tions (see also [26]). For the general case of starshaped sets in R
n
these
characterizations require that the valuations in question be defined on
the entire class of Lnstars. However, by using Theorem 11.2.4 one can
prove similar characterizations for valuations defined merely on finite
unions of convex cones in R
3
(of finite height) having a common apex
at the origin. This is a much smaller and more manageable class of
objects, which is nonetheless dense in the original and larger class of
L3stars. Clearly a higher dimensional version of Theorem 11.2.1 or
Theorem 11.2.4 would have similar and important consequences in the
theory of valuations on starshaped sets in Rn.
Bibliography
[1] R. V. Ambartzumian. Combinatorial Integral Geometry. (New York:
John Wiley and Sons, 1982).
[2] R. V. Ambartzumian. Factorization Calculus and Geometric Probabil
ity. (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1990).
[3] I. Anderson. Combinatorics of Finite Sets. (New York: Oxford Univer
sity Press, 1987).
[4] E. Artin. The Gamma Function. (New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Win
ston, Inc., 1964).
[5] E. Barbier. Note sur Ie probleme de l'aiguille et Ie jeu du joint couvert,
J. Mathematiques Pures et Appliquees (2), 5 (1860), 273286.
[6] C. Berge. Sur une propriete combinatoire des ensembles convexes, C.
R. Acad. Sci. Paris, 248 (1959), 26982699.
[7] C. Berge. Hypergraphs. (New York: Elsevier Science Publishers, 1989).
[8] V. Boltianskii. Hilbert's Third Problem. (New York: John Wiley and
Sons, 1978).
[9] A. Cauchy. Note sur divers theorems relatifs a la rectification des
courbes et a la quadrature des surfaces, C. R. Acad. Sci., Paris, 13
(1841), 10601065.
Also: Oeuvres Completes (1), 6 (Paris: 1888), pp. 369375.
[10] A. Cauchy. Memoire sur la rectification des courbes et la quadrature
des surfaces courbes, Mem. Acad. Sci. Paris, 22 (1850), 3.
Also: Oeuvres Completes (1),2 (Paris: 1908), pp. 167177.
[11] B. Chen, The GramSommerville and GaussBonnet theorems and
geometric measures for noncompact polyhedra, Adv. Math., 91 (1992),
26929l.
[12] B. Chen, On the Euler characteristic of finite unions of convex sets,
Disc. Comput. Geom., 10 (1993), 7993.
[13] B. Chen and G.C. Rota. Totally invariant set functions of polynomial
type, Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 47 (1994), 187197.
[14] M. W. Crofton. On the theory of local probability, applied to straight
lines drawn at random in a plane; the methods used being also extended
Bibliography 169
to the proof of certain new theorems in the integral calculus, Philos.
Trans. Roy. Soc. London, 158 (1868), 181199.
[15] M. W. Crofton. Sur quelques theorems de calcul integral, C. R. Acad.
Sci., Paris, 68 (1869), 14691470.
[16] M. W. Crofton. Geometrical theorems relating to mean values, Proc.
London Math. Soc., 8 (1877), 304309.
[17] M. W. Crofton. Probability. Encyclopaedia Britannica, 9th Edition, 19
(1885), 768788.
[18] L. Danzer, B. Griinbaum and V. Klee. Helly's theorem and its relatives.
Convexity, Proceedings of Symposia in Pure Mathematics, Volume VII.
(Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society, 1963), 101177.
[19] M. Dehn. Uber den Rauminhalt, Math. Ann., 55 (1901), 465478.
[20] G. Dolzmann and D. Hug. Equality of two representations of extended
affine surface area, Arch. Math., 65 (1995), 352356.
[21] J. Eckhoff. Helly, Radon, and Carathe6dory type theorems. Handbook
of Convex Geometry, Peter M. Gruber and Jorg M. Wills, Eds. (Ams
terdam: NorthHolland, 1993), 389448.
[22] P. Erdos. On a lemma of Littlewood and Offord, Bull. Amer. Math.
Soc., 51 (1945), 898902.
[23] W. Feller. An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications,
Volume II, 2nd Edition. (New York: Wiley Publishers, 1957).
[24] S. Fisk. Whitney numbers of projective space over R, C, H, and the
padics, J. Combinatorial Theory, Series A, 70 (1995), 165169.
[25] J. H. G. Fu. Kinematic formulas in integral geometry. Indiana Univ.
Math. J .. 39 (1990), 11151154.
[26] R. J. Gardner. Geometric Tomography (New York: Cambridge Univer
sity Press, 1995).
[27] Classic Papers in Combinatorics, Ira Gessel and G.C. Rota, Eds.
(Boston: Birkhiiuser Verlag, 1987).
[28] A. GhouilaHouri. Sur l'etude combinatoire des familles de convexes,
C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, 252 (1961), 494496.
[29] C. Greene and D. Kleitman. Proof techniques in the theory of finite
sets. Studies in Combinatorics, G.C. Rota, Ed. (Mathematical Asso
ciation of America, 1978), 2279.
[30] N. T. Gridgeman. Geometric probability and the number 1[', Scripta
Math., 25 (1960), 183195.
[31] E. Grinberg, D. Ren and J. Zhou. The symmetric isoperimetric
deficit and the containment problem in a plane of constant curvature.
Preprint.
[32] H. Groemer. On the extension of additive functionals on classes of
convex sets, Pacific J. Math., 75 (1978), 397410.
[33] H. Groemer. Fourier series and spherical harmonics in convexity. Hand
book of Convex Geometry, Peter M. Gruber and Jorg M. Wills, Eds.
(Amsterdam: NorthHolland, 1993), 12591296.
[34] H. Groemer. Geometric Applications of Fourier Series and Spherical
Harmonics. (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996).
170 Bibliography
[35] H. Hadwiger. Uberdeckung ebener Bereiche durch Kreise und
Quadrate, Comment. Math. Helv., 13 (1941), 195200.
[36] H. Hadwiger. Gegenseitige Bedeckbarkeit zweier Eibereiche und
Isoperimetrie. Vierteljschr. Naturforsch. Gesellsch. Zurich, 86 (1941),
152156.
[37] H. Hadwiger. Eulers Charakteristik und kombinatorische Geometrie,
J. reine angew. Math., 194 (1955), 101110.
[38] H. Hadwiger. Altes und Neues uber Konvexe Korper. (Basel:
Birkhiiuser Verlag, 1955).
[39] H. Hadwiger. Vorlesungen uber Inhalt, Oberftiiche und Isoperimetrie.
(Berlin: Springer Verlag, 1957).
[40] H. Hadwiger and P. Glur. Zerlegungsgleichheit ebener Polygone, Elem.
Math.,6 (1951),97106.
[41] G. H. Hardy, J. E. Littlewood, and G. P6lya. Inequalities, 2nd Edition.
(New York: Cambridge University Press, 1988).
[42] L. H. Harper and G.C. Rota. Matching theory, an introduction, Adv.
Probability,1 (1971), 171215.
[43] E. Helly. Uber Mengen konvexer Karper mit gemeinschaftlichen Punk
ten, Jber. Deutsch. Math. Verein., 32 (1923), 175176.
[44] D. Hilbert. Mathematical Problems. Lecture delivered before the Inter
national Congress of Mathematicians in Paris, 1900. Translated by M.
W. Newson, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc., 8 (1902), 437479.
[45] M. Hochberg and W. M. Hirsch. Sperner families, ssystems, and a
theorem of Meshalkin, Annals New York Acad. Sci., 175 (1970), 224
237.
[46] R. Howard. The kinematic formula in Riemannian homogeneous
spaces, Memoirs Amer. Math. Soc., 509 (1993).
[47] S. Karlin. Total Positivity. (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press,
1968).
[48] G. Katona. A theorem of finite sets, Theory of Graphs, (Akademia
Kiad6, Budapest: 1968), 187207.
[49] M. Kendall and P. Moran. Geometrical Probability. (New York: Hafner
Publishing Co., 1963).
[50] D. Klain. A short proof of Hadwiger's characterization theorem, Math
ematika, 42 (1995), 329339.
[51] D. Klain. Star valuations and dual mixed volumes, Adv. Math., 121
(1996), 80101.
[52] D. Klain. Invariant valuations on starshaped sets, Adv. Math., 125
(1997),95113.
[53] D. Klain. Kinematic formulas for finite vector spaces, to appear in
Discrete Math.
[54] D. Klain. Even valuations on convex bodies. Preprint.
[55] D. Klain and G.C. Rota. A continuous analogue of Sperner's theorem,
Comm. Pure Appl. Math., 50 (1997),205223.
[56] V. Klee. On certain intersection properties of convex sets, Canadian J.
Math., 3 (1951), 272275.
Bibliography 171
[57] J. B. Kruskal. The number of simplices in a complex. Mathematical
Optimization Techniques. (University of California Press, 1963), 251
278.
[58] T. Kubota. tIber konvexgeschlossene Mannigfaltigkeiten im n
dimensionalen Raume, Sci. Rep. T8hoku Univ., 14 (1925), 8599.
[59] K. Leichtweiss. Zur Affinoberfiache konvexer Korper, Manuscripta
Math., 56 (1986), 429464.
[60] K. Leichtweiss. tIber einige Eigenschaften der Affinoberfiache beliebiger
konvexer Korper, Resultate Math., 13 (1988), 255282.
[61] K. Leichtweiss. Bemerkungen zur Definition einer erweiterten Affi
noberfiache von E. Lutwak, Manuscripta Math., 65 (1989), 181197.
[62] F. W. Levi. Eine Erganzung zum Hellyschen Satz, Arch. Math., 4
(1953), 222224.
[63] D. Lubell. A short proof of Sperner's theorem, J. Combinatorial The
ory, 1 (1966), 299.
[64] E. Lutwak. Dual mixed volumes, Pacific J. Math., 58 (1975), 531538.
[65] E. Lutwak. Intersection bodies and dual mixed volumes, Adv. Math.,
71 (1988), 232261.
[66] E. Lutwak. Extended affine surface area, Adv. Math., 85 (1991), 3968.
[67] E. Lutwak. Selected affine isoperimetric inequalities, Handbook of Con
vex Geometry, Peter M. Gruber and Jorg M. Wills, Eds. (Amsterdam:
NorthHolland, 1993), 151176.
[68] E. Lutwak. Containment and circumscribing simplices, to appear in
Disc. Comput. Geom.
[69] M. Marcus and H. Mine. A Survey of Matrix Theory and Matrix In
equalities. (New York: Dover Publications, 1992).
[70] P. McMullen. Nonlinear anglesum relations for polyhedral cones and
polytopes, Math. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc., 78 (1975), 247261.
[71] P. McMullen. Valuations and dissections, Handbook of Convex Geom
etry, Peter M. Gruber and Jorg M. Wills, Eds. (Amsterdam: North
Holland, 1993), 933988.
[72] P. McMullen and R. Schneider. Valuations on convex bodies, Convexity
and Its Applications, Peter M. Gruber and Jorg M. Wills, Eds. (Boston:
Birkhauser Verlag, 1983), 170247.
[73] L. D. Meshalkin. A generalization of Sperner's theorem on the number
of subsets of a finite set, Theor. Probability Appl., 8 (1963), 203204.
[74] J. Milnor and J. Stasheff. Characteristic Classes (Princeton, NJ:
Princeton University Press, 1974).
[75] J. Munkres. Elements of Algebraic Topology. (Menlo Park, CA: Ben
jamin/Cummings, 1984).
[76] L. Nachbin. The Haar Integral. (New York: D. Van Nostrand Company,
1965).
[77] D. Ren. Topics in Integral Geometry. (Singapore: World Scientific In
ternational Publisher, 1992).
[78] G.C. Rota. On the foundations of combinatorial theory, I: Theory of
Mobius functions, Z. Wahrscheinlichkeit. 2, 368 (1964), 340368.
172 Bibliography
[79] G.C. Rota. On the combinatorics of the Euler characteristic. Studies
in Pure Mathematics (Papers Presented to Richard Rado) (London:
Academic Press, 1971), 221233.
[80] GianCarlo Rota on Combinatorics: Introductory Papers and Com
mentaries, Joseph P. S. Kung, Ed. (Boston: Birkhauser Verlag, 1995).
[81] C.H. Sah. Hilbert's Third Problem: Scissors Congruence. (San Fran
cisco: Fearon Pitman Publishers, 1979).
[82] L. A. Santalo. Integral Geometry and Geometric Probability. (Reading,
MA: AddisonWesley, 1976).
[83] S. Schanuel. What is the length of a potato? An introduction to
geometric measure theory. Categories in Continuum Physics, 1982,
Springer Lecture Notes in Math., 1174 (1986),118126.
[84] S. Schanuel. Negative sets have Euler characteristic and dimension.
Category Theory, 1990, Springer Lecture Notes in Math., 1488 (1991),
379385.
[85] R. Schneider. Convex Bodies: The BrunnMinkowski Theory. (New
York: Cambridge University Press, 1993).
[86] R. Schneider. Simple valuations on convex bodies, Mathematika, 43
(1996), 3239.
[87] R. Schneider and J.A. Wieacker. Integral geometry, Handbook of Con
vex Geometry, Peter M. Gruber and Jorg M. Wills, Eds. (Amsterdam:
NorthHolland, 1993), 13491390.
[88] C. Schutt. On the affine surface area, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc., 118
(1993), 12131218.
[89] C. Schutt and E. Werner. The convex floating body, Math. Scand., 66
(1990), 275290.
[90] H. Solomon. Geometric Probability. (Philadelphia: Society for Indus
trial and Applied Mathematics, 1978).
[91] E. Sperner. Ein Satz uber Untermengen einer endlichen Menge, Math.
Z., 27 (1928), 544548.
[92] R. Stanley. Enumerative Combinatorics. (Monterey, CA: Wadsworth
& Brooks/Cole Advanced Books and Software, 1986).
[93] E. Steinitz. Bedingt konvergente Reihen und konvexe Systeme, J. reine
angew. Math., 143 (1913), 128175.
[94] G. Strang. Linear Algebra and its Applications, 3rd Edition. (New York:
Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1988).
[95] J. J. Sylvester. On a funicular solution of Buffon's 'problem of the
needle' in its most general form, Acta Math., 14 (1890), 185205.
[96] R. Vitale. The Wills functional and Gaussian processes, Ann. Probab.,
24 (1996), 21722178.
[97] F. W. Warner. Foundations of Differentiable Manifolds and Lie Groups.
(New York: Springer Verlag, 1983).
[98] W. Weil. Kinematic integral formulas for convex bodies, Contributions
to Geometry, Proc. Geometry Symp., Siegen, 1978, J. Tolke and Jorg
M. Wills, Eds. (Boston: Birkhauser Verlag, 1978), 6076.
[99] W. Weil. Stereology: A survey for geometers, Convexity and its Appli
cations, Peter M. Gruber and Jorg M. Wills, Eds. (Boston: Birkhauser
Bibliography 173
Verlag, 1983), 360412.
[100] E. Werner. Illumination bodies and affine surface area, Studia Math.,
110 (1994), 257269
[101] J. M. Wills. Zur Gitterpunktanzahl konvexer Mengen, Elemente Math.,
28 (1973), 5763.
[102] G. Zhang. Geometric inequalities and inclusion measures of convex
bodies, Mathematika, 41 (1994),95116.
[103] G. Zhang. Dual kinematic formulas. Preprint.
[104] J. Zhou. A kinematic formula and analogues of Hadwiger's theorem in
space, Contemporary Math., 140 (1992), 159167.
[105] J. Zhou. The sufficient condition for a convex body to fit another in
R
4
, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc., 121 (1994),907913.
[106] J. Zhou. Kinematic formulas for mean curvature powers of hypersur
faces and Hadwiger's theorem in R
2n
, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 345
(1994), 243262.
[107] J. Zhou. When can one domain enclose another in R
3
?, J. Austral.
Math. Soc. (Series A), 59 (1995), 266272.
Bn ,31
CI:,123
88
En, 86
Fi(P), 138
H+,34
H,34
lA, 7, 144
K +EBn, 31
K +L, 43, 99
KIV,55
L(B), 21
L(/l), 154
M(Q, r), 138
O(n),60
P(P(B)), 21
P(B), 13
Pier), 138
Pk(B), 13
Pal , ... ,a
r
(B), 18
B(K),55
BO(n), 100
BO(n,B),100
BK,109
T2,117
Tn, 43
W(K),134
Zc,4
[0, l]n, 38, 101
[n]!,62
[n], 61, 66
[x, y], 13
/l(K,L),151
ret), 63
0,141
Q,39
R2 1
Rn',30
R
Q
,39
Index of symbols
Snl, 56
Z,112
k,143
V, 143
b(K, L), 31
ix, 120
0, 7
x, 95
Ai, 3
A
k
, 86
(n/2), 14
(nlr),20
f.L(J; K), 132
f.LQ, 22, 35, 37, 46
f.Lk, 23, 36, 91
f.Leven, 106
f.Lodd, 106
vI:, 63
vn,73
1/{}:1, ... ,a
r
l78
v n ;r(A),79
Wn, 55, 63, 66
I8>Z,116
'it, 120
V, 103
x, 21
8K,4
<Pn, 62
aal, ... ,arl 19
CTnl, 61
Tn, 58
'ei , 156
Tn, 30
Iir, 36
90
pn, 83
Tn, 62
(k, 152
d(x, A), 31
ek(tl,t2, ... ,tn ),23
hK, 42, 99
o*K,155
rex), 13
uL, 56
x V y, 6, 60
x 1\ y, 6, 60
K(Sn),155
Kn,42
K'd, 99
,112
p(Sn), 154
V,129
78
' 63
m, 14,69
(al ,n,aJ, 18, 19
IAI,14
sw(K), 160
Index of symbols
175
Index
Aff(n), 86
affine Grassmannian, 86
affine hull, 138
affine surface area, 141
Ambartzumian, R. V., 5
antichain, 13
Barbier, E., xi, 5, 141
binomial, 14
bivaluation, 142
Boolean algebra, 11, 13
box, 30
BrunnMinkowski inequality, 108
Buffon needle problem, xi, 1, 129
Caratheodory's theorem, 52
Cauchy's surface area formula, 56
centrally symmetric, 99
chain, 13
Chen, B., 29, 58
chord, 129
combinatorics, xi, 62, 63, 71, 78, 84, 127
compatible
discrete flag, 19
flag of subspaces, 78
cone, 155
continuity, 31, 44
convex hull, 51
convex ring, 42
convex set
centered, 99
in Rn, 42
in the plane, 3
random, 147
spherical, 155
symmetric, 107
convexcontinuity, 44
cosine transform, 100
Crofton's formula, 124
Crofton, M. W., xi, 3, 5, 141
crosssection, 128
De Giorgi, E., 42
Dec(n,r),77
Dec(S,r),18
Dehn invariant, 115
discrete basis theorem, 23, 144
dissection, 115
Erdos, P., 29
Euclidean motion, 43, 146
Euler characteristic, 29, 58
discrete, 22
on parallelotopes, 37
on polyconvex sets, 46
on spherical polytopes, 156
Euler's formula
discrete, 23
for intrinsic volumes, 93
for polytopes, 49
expectation, 1, 112, 126, 128, 129, 149,
152
face enumerator, 23, 29, 143
facet, 21
filter, 143
Fisk, S., 84
flag, 13
flag coefficient, 63
formulas for, 67
maximal, 73
Pascal's triangle, 69
Flag(n),61
frame, 62
Fu, J., 153
fundamental domain, 112
gamma function, 63, 72
Gardner, R., 145
generating set, 8
geometric probability, xi, 1, 5, 25, 92,
147
Gr(n, k), 61
Graff(2, 1), 3
Graff(n, k), 86
Graff(A; k), 88
Grassmannian,61
affine, 86
great circle, 154
Groemer's extension theorem, 44
for parallelotopes, 32
in the sphere, 155
Groemer's integral theorem, 8
Groemer, H., 12, 58
group action, 60, 83, 86
Haar measure
on Grassmannians, 61
on projective space, 57
on the Euclidean motions, 146
on the orthogonal group, 83
probability, 57, 126
Hadwiger's characterization theorem,
118
for parallelotopes, 40
spherical analogue, 159
Hadwiger's containment theorem, 151
spherical analogue, 164
Hadwiger's formula, 91, 123
Hadwiger, H., xii, 58, 117
Harper, L., 29
Hausdorff distance, 31
Helly's theorem, 52
discrete, 28
for subspaces, 81
hemisphere, 154
Hilbert's third problem, 11, 115
Hirsch, W. M., 29
Hochberg, M., 29
homogeneous space, 83
Howard, R., 153
hyperplane, 30
inclusionexclusion principle, 7
indicator function, 7, 144
integral, 8
intrinsic volume, 58, 88, 94, 130
computation, 135
discrete, 23
normalization, 111
of a convex polytope, 137
of a convex set, 90
of a parallelotope, 37, 136
of a product, 37, 130
of the unit ball, 122
invariance, 22, 31, 43, 95
Index
join, 6, 60
KatonaKruskal theorem, 29
kinematic formula
discrete, 25
general, 153
principal, 148, 153
spherical, 162
Klain, D., 84, 117
Klee's theorem, 50
Kubota's theorem, 126, 141
L.Y.M. inequality
continuous, 73, 79
discrete, 14, 19
lattice, 6, 29
distributive, 6, 21
in Rn, 112
of parallelotopes, 30
of polyconvex sets, 42
of subsets, 13
of subspaces, 60
lattice point, 112
Lie group, 83, 145
linear functional, 10, 46
Lubell, D., 29
lune, 154, 165
Lutwak's containment theorem, 54
Lutwak, E., 145
Mobius function, 96
McMullen, P., 11, 58, 166
mean chord length, 129
mean crosssectional volume, 128
mean projection formula, 94, 125
mean spherical width, 160
meet, 6, 60
Meshalkin's theorem
continuous, 81
discrete, 20
Minkowski linear combination, 140
Minkowski sum, 43, 99
mixed volumes, 140, 141
Mod(n), 60
moment, 133
monotone, 32
Mult(n;al, ... ,ar ),77
multiflag coefficient, 78
multinomial coefficient, 18
needle, xi, 1, 129
normalization theorem, 37, 111
or(V),87
order ideal, 76, 95
orthogonal group, 60, 83, 146
special, 100
177
178
Par(n),30
Par(Vl, ... , vn ), 136
parallelotopes, 30
partially ordered set, 6, 21, 60, 86, 95,
143
Pascal inequality, 71
Pascal's triangle
for flag coefficients, 69, 70
for binomial coefficients, 70
permutation group, 22, 24
permutation of coordinates, 30, 36, 40
Polycon( n), 42
polyconvex set, 42
polygon, 2, 117, 150
polynomial type, 142
polytope, 47
spherical, 154
quotient space, 128
rdecomposition
discrete, 18
in Mod(n), 77
rfamily
discrete, 15
in Mod(n), 75
Index
spherical excess, 158
spherical geometry, 154
spherical length, 156
spherical polytope, 154
stabilizer, 84
starshaped set, 145, 167
Steiner's formula, 122, 140
support function, 42, 99
support plane, 43
surface area, 56
Sylvester's theorem, 4, 93, 147
Sylvester J.J., 3, 5
symmetric convex set, 99
symmetric function, 23, 35
syzygy ,144
tensor product 116
totally positive 144
translation, 30, 43, 101, 116
translation invariance, 36, 44
valuation, 6, 22, 30, 32, 42, 44
even, 106
homogeneous, 40
increasing, 32
monotone, 32
random variable, 1, 3, 25, 112, 126, 128,
odd, 106
129, 149
rank, 13
relative interior, 48
relint(P), 48
Rota, G.C., 29, 84
ssystem, 18, 77
Sah, C.H., 109, 117
Santal6, L., 153
Schutt, C., 141
Schanuel, S., xii, 29, 140
Schneider's characterization theorem,
108, 117
Schneider, R., 11, 58
scissors congruent, 115
segment, 96
of a Boolean algebra, 13
simple function, 7
simple valuation, 101
simplex, 21, 54, 77, 142
dissection of, 109
random, 25
simplicial complex, 21, 77, 142
special orthogonal group, 100
Sperner's theorem
continuous, 74
discrete, 14, 29
for rfamilies, 15, 75
spherical area theorem, 156
spherical convex set, 155
on the sphere, 155
simple, 101
volume characterization theorem, 105
volume of unit ball, 63
volume theorem
for parallelotopes, 38, 136
for polyconvex sets, 110
spherical, 164
Wills functional, 134, 141
wire, 2
Zhang, G., 153
Zhou, J., 153
zonoid,99
zonotope, 99